JP5844066B2 - Gaming system and gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming system and a gaming machine. Specifically, the present invention relates to a gaming system including a gaming machine capable of performing a predetermined game and a management device that manages a gaming history of the gaming machine of the player, and a gaming machine included in the gaming system.

  Conventionally, when a game is played again by displaying a password at the end of the game, there has been a ball game machine that can continue the game by accepting the input of the password (for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2010-104850 A

  However, according to the ball game machine of Patent Document 1, the player forgets the new password or confuses the new password with the old password, but starts playing with the old password. There was a possibility. For this reason, there is a problem that the game cannot be continued, disadvantageous to the player, and the interest of the game is lowered.

  The present invention has been devised in view of such circumstances, and its purpose is to prevent the player from starting with a old password, thereby reducing the interest of the game without causing any disadvantage to the player. It is an object to provide a gaming system and a gaming machine that can be prevented.

Specific examples of means for solving the problems and their effects

(1) A gaming machine (for example, a slot machine 1 or a pachinko gaming machine 700) capable of performing a predetermined game, and a game history (including not only a game result but also a halfway progress) of the player in the gaming machine. A gaming system (for example, gaming system 1001) including a management device (for example, management server 1200) for management,
The management device
Specific information that can specify a part of the past game history (for example, numerical values indicating levels and story stages may be used, or information indicating numerical values indicating levels and story stages may be specified). ) issuing means for issuing a password to enable updating the game history continuously from unrealized past game history to the player (e.g., comprising the step S234) in FIG. 26,
The gaming machine is
Password input accepting means (for example, step S1231 in FIG. 27) for accepting input of the password (for example, a password issued by the management server 1200 according to the game history and received by the portable terminal 1100) from the player ;
After the input of the password is accepted by the password input acceptance means, a predetermined end condition (for example, a condition that a two-dimensional code display operation has been performed, a condition that the display has shifted to the demo screen, a new password is entered, and a new password is entered. When the acquisition of a new game history is started, the condition that a power interruption has occurred, and the condition that a long press start of the effect switch has been established) The output means (for example, step S1262, step S1263 in FIG. 29) outputs the game history information (for example, a two-dimensional code) that can specify the game history during the period until the end condition is satisfied with the specific information. It may be output to the portable terminal 1100 as in step S1267 or the management server 120.
It may be output directly to 0 or via a card unit. )When,
Game history information specifying information that can specify the game history information output by the output means (for example, image data of a two-dimensional code as shown in FIG. 24 or game history data may be used. ) And specific information included in the password accepted by the password input accepting means (for example, the password itself as shown in FIG. 24, the level included in the password, and the stage of the story) A password storage unit (for example, step S1265 in FIG. 29) that stores the numerical value itself and the information indicating that the numerical value indicating the level and the stage of the story can be specified. Prepared,
The management device
Object determination means for determining whether or not the specific information included in the password issued by the issuing means and the specific information attached to the game history information output by the output means are the same (for example, FIG. Step S242),
A specifying means (for example, step S246 in FIG. 26) for specifying a game history based on the game history information output by the output means;
A game history storage means (for example, step S246 in FIG. 26) for storing the game history specified by the specifying means on the condition that the specific information is determined to be the same by the target determination means (the game history is stored) Each time it is played, the password corresponding to the game history may be stored).
The gaming machine further includes:
Determining means for determining whether or not the password received by the password input accepting means is stored in the password storage means (for example, comparing passwords themselves as in steps S1232 and S1233 in FIG. 27) The password may be completely matched or partially matched, or the password may be completely matched by comparing the level and story level included in the password.)
Stored in the password storage unit in association with the password on condition that the determination unit determines that the password is stored (for example, YES in step S1233 of FIG. 27). It is provided with already-output notification means (for example, step S1241 in FIG. 27) for notifying that the game history information specified by the game history information specifying information has already been output.

  According to such a configuration, a password including specific information is issued by the management device. After the password input is received by the gaming machine and the password input is received, when the predetermined end condition is satisfied, the game during the period from when the password input is received until the predetermined end condition is satisfied The game history information that can specify the history is output with the specific information, and the output game history information that can specify the game history information and the password that is accepted are stored in association with each other. . The management device determines whether the specific information included in the issued password is the same as the specific information attached to the game history information output from the gaming machine, and the gaming history information output from the gaming machine Based on the above, the game history is specified, and the specified game history is stored on condition that it is determined that the specific information is the same. It is determined whether or not the password accepted by the gaming machine is stored. If it is determined that the password is stored, the game history information specifying information stored in association with the password is stored. It is notified that the game history information specified in is already output.

  For this reason, when an old password is input, the player is notified that game history information corresponding to the password has already been output. As a result, it is possible to provide a gaming system that can prevent a player from starting a game with an old password, and can prevent a decrease in the interest of the game without causing any disadvantage to the player.

(2) In the gaming system of (1) above,
The output means stores the password in association with the password on condition that the determination means determines that the password is stored (for example, YES is determined in step S1233 of FIG. 27). The game history information specified by the game history information specifying information stored in the means is output again (for example, step S1242 in FIG. 27).

  According to such a configuration, on the condition that the password is stored by the gaming machine, the game history information specified by the game history information specifying information stored in association with the password is again stored. Is output.

  For this reason, when an old password is input, game history information corresponding to the password is output again. As a result, even if the user has forgotten to record a password that can identify the previous game history, it is possible to prevent the game from being reduced without detriment to the player.

(3) In the gaming system of (1) or (2) above,
The gaming machine further includes:
Comprising a condition determination means (for example, step S1261 in FIG. 29) for determining whether or not the end condition is satisfied;
The password storage means, on the condition that the condition determination means determines that the termination condition is satisfied (for example, YES is determined in step S1261 in FIG. 29), and the game history information specifying information and the password storage means The password is stored in association with each other (for example, step S1265 in FIG. 29).

  According to such a configuration, it is determined whether or not the end condition is satisfied by the gaming machine, and the game history information specifying information and the password are associated with each other on the condition that the end condition is determined to be satisfied. Is remembered.

  For this reason, even if the end condition is satisfied but the game history information is not made, information capable of specifying the game history information corresponding to the input password is stored. As a result, the game history information can be provided to the player, so that the player can be prevented from being disadvantaged.

(4) In the game system according to any one of (1) to (3) above,
The management device further includes:
Whether the specific information that can be specified by the password when the password is issued this time by the issuing means is the same as the specific information that can be specified by the previously issued password. Game history determination means for determining (step S234 in FIG. 26),
The issuing means does not generate a password this time and issues the previously issued password on condition that the game history determining means determines that the current and previous specific information are the same (FIG. 26). Step S234).

  According to such a configuration, when the password is issued by the management device this time, the specific information that can be specified by the password is the same as the specific information that can be specified by the previously issued password. If it is determined whether or not the current specific information is the same as the previous specific information, no password is generated this time, and the previously issued password is issued.

  For this reason, when there is no change in the specific information, a new password is not generated, and a once generated password is issued. As a result, the processing burden on the management device can be reduced.

(5) In the gaming system according to any one of (1) to (4) above,
The management device further includes:
Transmitting means that can transmit data for displaying the game history specified by the specifying means (including those updated and reflected in the managed game history) to the mobile terminal (for example, FIG. 38 step S154, step S186 in FIG. 39, step S196 in FIG. 40).

  According to such a configuration, the management device can transmit data for displaying the specified game history on the mobile terminal to the mobile terminal.

  For this reason, the game history is displayed on the portable terminal. As a result, it is interesting to acquire the game history.

(6) In the gaming system of (5) above,
The transmission means further provides a special effect (for example, a display effect, a sound effect, etc.) according to the game history specified by the specifying means (including those updated and reflected in the managed game history). It is possible to transmit data to be performed by the portable terminal to the portable terminal (for example, step S153 in FIG. 38, step S154, step S185 in FIG. 39, step S186, step S195 in FIG. 40, step S196). And

  For this reason, not only the game history is displayed on the mobile terminal, but also a special effect determined based on the game history is performed. As a result, it is interesting to acquire the game history.

(7) In the gaming system of (6) above,
The transmission means has a special effect (for example, FIG. 41 (FIG. 41 (FIG. D) can be transmitted.

  According to such a configuration, the special effect data determined based on the game history of the specific item among the specified game history can be transmitted to the portable terminal by the management device. For this reason, the special effect determined based on the game history of the specific item is performed on the mobile terminal. As a result, by making the specific item an item that the player pays attention to, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the special effect.

(8) In the gaming system of (6) or (7) above,
The management device
Receiving means (for example, step S152 in FIG. 38, step S184 in FIG. 39, step S194 in FIG. 40) for receiving information indicating the selection result by the player as to whether or not to perform the special effect from the portable terminal;
The transmission means provides data for causing the mobile terminal to perform a special effect determined based on the game history on condition that information indicating a selection result indicating that the special effect is performed is received by the receiving means. Transmission is possible (for example, step S153 in FIG. 38, step S185 in FIG. 39, and step S195 in FIG. 40).

  According to such a configuration, information indicating the selection result by the player whether or not to perform the special effect is received from the portable terminal, and information indicating the selection result that the special effect is performed is received by the management device. On this condition, data for causing the mobile terminal to perform a special effect determined based on the game history can be transmitted. For this reason, the player can be able to see the special effect when he / she wants to see it, and can not see the special effect when he / she does not want to see it. As a result, special effects that meet the needs of the player can be performed.

(9) In the gaming system of (5) above,
The management device further includes:
Information receiving means (for example, for receiving player information added by a player from the portable terminal with respect to the game history specified by the specifying means (including those updated and reflected in the managed game history) The player information received by the portable terminal 1100 may be received from the portable terminal 1100 as in steps S157 and S161 of FIG. 38 and steps S122 and S123 of FIG. 37, or may be received by a gaming machine or a card unit. The player information may be received from the portable terminal 1100 that is received and included in the game history information and output to the portable terminal 1100.
The transmitting means can further transmit data for displaying the player information received by the information receiving means on the portable terminal to the portable terminal (for example, step S117 and step S144 in FIG. 37). It is characterized by.

  According to such a configuration, player information added by the player to the specified game history is received from the mobile terminal by the management device, and the specified game history and the received player information are stored in the mobile terminal. Data to be displayed in can be transmitted to the mobile terminal. For this reason, the player information added by the player when displaying the game history can be referred to. As a result, it can be more interesting to acquire the game history.

(10) In the gaming system of (9) above,
The information accepting means may select any of a plurality of timings from when the game history information is output by the output means to when the data is transmitted by the transmitting means (for example, step S157 and step S161 in FIG. 42B, the timing at which the screen of FIG. 42B is displayed, and the timing at which the screen of FIG. 43E is displayed at steps S122 and S123 in FIG. Can be received.

  According to such a configuration, it is possible for the management device to accept player information at any of a plurality of timings from when the game history information is output until data is transmitted. For this reason, the player can input the player information at a plurality of timings such as a timing for updating the game history and a timing for checking the game history. As a result, it is possible to easily input player information, and it is possible to improve interest.

(11) In the gaming system of (9) or (10) above,
The transmission means can transmit the data not only to the portable terminal of the player who acquired the game history but also to the portable terminals of other players (for example, step S154 in FIG. 38, FIG. 39 and step S186 in FIG. 40, step S196 in FIG. 40, and step S117 and step S144 in FIG.
The management device further uses the player information as first player information that can be displayed only on the portable terminal of the player who acquired the gaming history, or on a second terminal that can be displayed on the portable terminal of another player. Displayable selection accepting means for accepting selection of player information (for example, the setting selected on the screen of FIG. 42D transmitted in step S171 of FIG. 38 is received in step S172 of FIG. 38). 37, the setting selected on the screen of FIG. 43G transmitted in step S126 of FIG. 37 is received in step S127 of FIG.
The transmission means is the player information for which the selection of the first player information is accepted by the displayable selection accepting means for the portable terminal of the player who has acquired the game history, and the second The data for displaying the player information accepted to be selected as the player information can be transmitted (for example, either “history display” or “memo display” in FIG. 43A can be selected). On the other hand, to the other player's portable terminal, data for displaying the player information that has been selected as the second player information by the displayable selection receiving means is transmitted. Possible (for example, “history display” is selected as “permitted” for publication in FIG. 43G, and “history display” selected as “permitted” in step S128 in FIG. 37 is set to be disclosed. 44 (C) "History Display" is can be selected, characterized in that it is a "memo display" is not be selected.).

  According to such a configuration, the management device can transmit data not only to the portable terminal of the player who acquired the game history but also to the portable terminal of other players. Whether the player information is the first player information that can be displayed only on the portable terminal of the player who has acquired the game history, or the second player information that can be displayed on the portable terminal of another player Is received, and the player's portable terminal that has acquired the game history is accepted to receive the selection of the player information as the first player information and the selection of the player information as the second player information. While the data for displaying the selected player information can be transmitted, the player information for which the selection as the second player information is accepted is displayed for the portable terminal of the other player Data can be transmitted.

(12) In the gaming system according to (5), the transmission means further includes the game history (managed game) specified by the specifying means for the portable terminal of the player who acquired the game history. Among the information updated (according to the history and updated) (for example, game history and player information), the information can be displayed only on the portable terminal of the player who acquired the game history. Data for displaying the first information and the second information that can be displayed on the mobile terminals of other players can be transmitted (for example, “history display”, “memo display” in FIG. 43A). On the other hand, data for displaying the second information can be transmitted to the mobile terminals of other players (for example, disclosure in FIG. 43G). "History display" is 37 is selected, “history display” selected as “permitted” in step S128 of FIG. 37 is set to be disclosed, “history display” can be selected in FIG. 37C, and “memo display” is selected. "Is not selectable.).

  According to such a configuration, the management device has acquired the game history from the information updated and accumulated in accordance with the specified game history for the mobile terminal of the player who has acquired the game history. Data for displaying the first information that can be displayed only on the mobile terminal of the player and the second information that can be displayed also on the mobile terminal of another player can be transmitted. Data for displaying the second information can be transmitted to the portable terminal. For this reason, it is possible to show the game history to other players. As a result, it can be more interesting to acquire the game history.

(13) In the gaming system of (12) above,
The management device further includes:
Information (for example, game history, player information) updated and accumulated in accordance with the game history specified by the specifying means (including those updated and reflected in the managed game history) is used as the first information. 38 or the second information is received by selection accepting means (for example, the setting selected on the screen of FIG. 42D transmitted in step S171 of FIG. 38 is the step of FIG. 38). (The setting selected on the screen in FIG. 43G transmitted in step S126 in FIG. 37 is received in step S127 in FIG. 37).
The transmission means selects, with respect to the portable terminal of the player who has acquired the game history, the information that the selection accepting means accepts as the first information and the second information. The data for displaying the received information can be transmitted (for example, either “history display” or “memo display” in FIG. 43A can be selected), while other players' For the portable terminal, it is possible to transmit data for displaying the information accepted as the second information by the selection accepting means (for example, “history display” for publication in FIG. 43G) Is selected as “permitted”, “history display” selected as “permitted” in step S128 of FIG. 37 is set to be disclosed, and “history display” can be selected in FIG. "Memo display" can be selected Not be.) Characterized in that it is a.

  According to such a configuration, the management device accepts selection of whether the information updated and accumulated according to the specified game history is the first information or the second information, and the game history For the portable terminal of the player who has acquired the information, the data for displaying the information accepted as the first information and the information accepted as the second information can be transmitted. On the other hand, data for displaying information that is accepted as selection of the second information can be transmitted to the portable terminal of another player. Therefore, information that can be displayed on the mobile terminal of the player and information that can be displayed on the mobile terminal of another player can be set according to the player's preference.

(14) In the gaming system of (12) or (13) above,
The management device further includes:
In order to display information that recommends the player to use the second information when the information updated and accumulated according to the game history includes specific information that does not appear frequently Is provided with recommended information transmitting means (for example, step S166 in FIG. 38) for transmitting the data to the portable terminal of the player.

  According to such a configuration, when the information updated and accumulated by the management device according to the game history includes specific information that does not appear frequently, the second information is used. Data for displaying information recommended to the player is transmitted to the portable terminal of the player. For this reason, the opportunity which can display the specific information which can receive attention from another player on a portable terminal of another player can be given. As a result, if the specific information can be displayed on the portable terminal of another player, the player can receive attention from the other player, so that the player can feel interesting.

(15) A gaming machine (for example, slot machine 1, pachinko gaming machine 700)
A gaming machine capable of performing a predetermined game,
It possible to update the player's game history continues specific information capable of specifying the unrealized past game history part of the past game history is issued by the management apparatus for managing a game history of the game machine Password input accepting means for accepting input of a password for the player from the player ,
After the password input is accepted by the password input acceptance means, when a predetermined end condition is satisfied, a game history of a period from when the password input is received until the predetermined end condition is satisfied Output means for outputting the specific information to the identifiable game history information; and
A password storage means for storing the game history information specifying information capable of specifying the game history information output by the output means and the password received by the password input receiving means in association with each other;
A determination unit for determining whether or not the password received by the password input reception unit is stored in the password storage unit;
On the condition that the password is stored by the determination means,
And an already-output notification means for notifying that the game history information specified by the game history information specifying information stored in the password storage means in association with the password has already been output.

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of preventing a decrease in the interest of the game without causing a disadvantage to the player by preventing the game from being started with an old password. be able to.

It is a figure which shows an example of the game system to which this invention was applied. It is a block diagram which shows an example of a structure of the portable terminal in this Embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows an example of a structure of the management server in this Embodiment. It is a front view of a slot machine as an example of a gaming machine to which the present invention is applied. It is an internal structure figure of a slot machine. It is a figure which shows the symbol arrangement | sequence of a reel. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of a slot machine. It is a figure which shows the structure of the combination defined as winning. It is a figure which shows the object combination and winning probability of the internal lottery classified by game state. It is a figure which shows the number of point provision according to level and the number of games. It is a figure which shows the transition of a main menu screen. It is a figure which shows the input condition of a password. It is a figure which shows the input condition of a password. It is a figure which shows the output condition of a two-dimensional code. It is a figure which shows time until it returns to a basic screen in each screen. (A) is a figure which shows a password analysis table, (b) is a figure which shows the analysis procedure of a password. It is a figure which shows the structure of a two-dimensional code. It is a figure which shows the display condition of the liquid crystal display mounted in a slot machine. It is a figure which shows a normal production | presentation selection rate and a specific production | presentation selection rate. It is a figure which shows the display condition of the liquid crystal display mounted in a slot machine. It is a figure which shows the display condition of the liquid crystal display mounted in a slot machine. It is a figure which shows the display condition of the liquid crystal display mounted in a slot machine. It is a figure which shows the structure of the player database with which the management server which is the management apparatus to which this invention is applied, a game history database, a privilege database, and a temporary registration database. It is a figure for demonstrating the password two-dimensional code database memorize | stored in gaming machines, such as a slot machine in this Embodiment. It is a 1st flowchart which shows the flow of the log | history management process performed with the management server in this Embodiment. It is a 2nd flowchart which shows the flow of the log | history management process performed with the management server in this Embodiment. 6 is a first flowchart showing a flow of password-related processing executed in the slot machine in the present embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the main menu display process performed with the slot machine in this Embodiment. It is a 2nd flowchart which shows the flow of the password related process performed with the slot machine in this Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the level related process performed with the slot machine in this Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the exchange of the portable terminal at the time of member registration and a management server. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing exchanges between a slot machine, a portable terminal, and a management server when playing a game without registering a member in the first embodiment. It is a diagram showing exchanges between the slot machine, portable terminal, and management server when playing a game by inputting a password. It is a diagram showing exchanges between the slot machine, portable terminal, and management server when playing a game without entering a password. It is a figure which shows the exchange of a portable terminal and a management server in the case of acquiring a privilege. It is a figure which shows the exchange of the slot machine, portable terminal, and management server in the case of playing a game without registering as a member in the second embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the game history display response process performed with the management server in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the log | history display process performed with the management server in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the history re-display process performed with the management server in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the others history display process performed with the management server in 3rd Embodiment. It is a 1st figure which shows the transition of the screen displayed on the portable terminal in 3rd Embodiment. It is a 2nd figure which shows the transition of the screen displayed on the portable terminal in 3rd Embodiment. It is a 3rd figure which shows the transition of the screen displayed on the portable terminal in 3rd Embodiment. It is a 4th figure which shows the transition of the screen displayed on the portable terminal in 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the transition of the screen displayed on the portable terminal in the modification of 3rd Embodiment. It is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine. It is a figure explaining the characteristic of control of hit type including big hit and small hit in a tabular form. It is a block diagram which shows an example of the circuit structure in a main board | substrate. It is a block diagram which shows the circuit structural example of a relay board | substrate, an effect control board | substrate, a lamp driver board | substrate, and an audio | voice output board | substrate. It is a figure which shows the transition of the screen displayed on the portable terminal in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the main menu display process performed with the pachinko game machine in 4th Embodiment.

[First Embodiment]
Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is a diagram showing an example of a gaming system 1001 to which the present invention is applied.

  As shown in FIG. 1, a gaming system 1001 to which the present invention is applied includes a slot machine 1 which is an example of a gaming machine of the present invention installed in a game arcade and a management apparatus of the present invention connected to the Internet network 900. The slot machine 1 and the management server 1200 exchange data via a portable terminal 1100 having a two-dimensional code reading function and a connection function to the Internet network 900. It is possible.

  FIG. 2 is a block diagram illustrating an example of a configuration of the mobile terminal 1100 in the present embodiment. Referring to FIG. 2, a mobile terminal 1100 includes a control unit 110, a storage unit 120, an operation unit 130, a display unit 140, a voice input / output unit 150, a wireless communication unit 160, an antenna 161, and infrared rays. A communication unit 180 and a camera unit 190 are included.

  The storage unit 120 includes a semiconductor memory such as a nonvolatile memory such as a ROM (Read Only Memory) or a flash memory, or a volatile memory such as a RAM (Random Access Memory). The storage unit 120 stores programs and data such as application programs for causing the control unit 110 to execute various functions of the mobile terminal 1100.

  The operation unit 130 includes dial keys, cross operation keys, and other function keys for inputting numbers such as telephone numbers and various data, alphabets, and other characters. The operation unit 130 receives data input from the user and transfers the input data to the control unit 110.

  The display unit 140 includes a liquid crystal display (hereinafter referred to as “LCD”). The display unit 140 may be configured by other display devices such as an EL (Electro Luminescence) display. Display unit 140 displays character data and image data received from control unit 110.

  The voice input / output unit 150 includes a microphone and a speaker. The voice input / output unit 150 converts the voice inputted from the outside into the microphone into an electric signal, delivers it to the control unit 110, converts the electric signal from the control unit 110 into voice, and outputs it to the outside through a speaker.

  The wireless communication unit 160 delivers a signal received by the antenna 161 from another portable terminal or server to the control unit 110 and causes the antenna 161 to output a signal to be transmitted from the control unit 110 to the other portable terminal or server.

  The infrared communication unit 180 passes a signal received from another device by infrared rays to the control unit 110, receives a signal to be transmitted to another device from the control unit 110, and transmits the signal by infrared rays.

  The camera unit 190 captures an imaging target, converts the captured image into image data, and outputs the converted image data to the control unit 110. In the present embodiment, a two-dimensional code is imaged.

  The control unit 110 includes a microprocessor (Micro Processing Unit, hereinafter referred to as “MPU”). The control unit 110 is input from the storage unit 120, the operation unit 130, the voice input / output unit 150, the wireless communication unit 160, the infrared communication unit 180, or the camera unit 190 according to a program such as an application program stored in the storage unit 120. The processed data is processed and output to the storage unit 120, the display unit 140, the voice input / output unit 150, the wireless communication unit 160, or the infrared communication unit 180.

  In the present embodiment, portable terminal 1100 may or may not include voice input / output unit 150.

  FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing an example of the configuration of the management server 1200 in the present embodiment. Referring to FIG. 3, management server 1200 includes a control unit 210, a storage unit 220, an operation unit 230, a display unit 240, and a communication unit 260.

  The storage unit 220 includes a nonvolatile memory such as a ROM and a flash memory, a semiconductor memory such as a volatile memory such as a RAM, and an external storage device such as a hard disk. The storage unit 220 stores programs and data for causing the control unit 210 to execute various functions of the management server 1200.

  The operation unit 230 includes input devices such as a keyboard and a mouse. The operation unit 230 receives data input from a user such as an administrator of the management server 1200 and passes the input data to the control unit 210.

  The display unit 240 is configured with an LCD. The display unit 240 may be configured by other display devices such as a CRT (Cathode Ray Tube) display and an EL (Electro Luminescence) display. Display unit 240 displays character data and image data received from control unit 210.

  The communication unit 260 transfers data received from the mobile terminal 1100 or another server via the Internet network 900 to the control unit 210, and transmits the data from the control unit 210 to the mobile terminal 1100 or other server via the Internet network 900. Output data.

  The control unit 210 is configured with an MPU. The control unit 210 processes data input from the storage unit 220, the operation unit 230, or the communication unit 260 according to the program stored in the storage unit 220, and stores the storage unit 220, the display unit 240, or the communication unit. To 260.

  As shown in FIGS. 4 and 5, the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment includes a housing 1 a whose front surface is open, a front door 1 b pivotally supported at a side end of the housing 1 a, It is composed of

  As shown in FIG. 5, inside the casing 1a of the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, reels 2L, 2C, and 2R (hereinafter, left reel, middle reel, As shown in FIG. 4, three consecutive symbols out of the symbols arranged on the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are provided from the see-through window 3 provided on the front door 1b. Arranged to be visible.

  As shown in FIG. 6, “black 7”, “net 7 (shaded 7 in the figure)”, “white 7”, “BAR”, “replay”, A plurality of types of mutually distinguishable symbols such as “watermelon”, “cherry”, “bell”, and “orange” are drawn in a predetermined order, 21 pieces each. The symbols drawn on the outer peripheries of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are displayed in the upper, middle, and lower three stages in the see-through window 3, respectively.

  The reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are provided in correspondence with each other and rotated by reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R (see FIG. 7), so that the symbols of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are continuously formed in the see-through window 3. In addition to being displayed while changing, by stopping the rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, three consecutive symbols are derived and displayed on the fluoroscopic window 3 as display results.

  Inside the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are reel sensors 33L, 33C, and 33R that detect a reference position for each of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, and a reel LED 55 that irradiates the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R from the back side. , Is provided. The reel LED 55 includes 12 LEDs corresponding to three consecutive symbols of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, and can irradiate each symbol independently.

  At the position corresponding to each reel 2L, 2C, 2R on the front door 1b, a horizontally long rectangular see-through window 3 that allows the reels 2L, 2C, 2R to be seen through from the front side is provided. The reels 2L, 2C, 2R can be visually recognized from the player side.

  The front door 1b uses a medal insertion unit 4 into which medals can be inserted, a medal payout exit 9 from which medals are paid out, and credits (the number of medals stored as a player's own game value). MAXBET switch 6 that is operated when setting the maximum bet number (3 in any game state in this embodiment) out of a prescribed number of bets determined according to the game state, stored as credits Settlement switch 10 that is operated when the medal used for setting the number of medals and the bet is set (to return the medals used for setting the credit and the number of bets), start that is operated when starting the game Switch 7, stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R operated when stopping the rotation of each of reels 2L, 2C, 2R, production switch 5 for use in production There are provided operable by the player.

  The front door 1b also displays a credit indicator 11 that displays the number of medals stored as credits, the number of medals paid out due to the occurrence of a prize, an error code indicating the contents when an error occurs, and the like. Game assist indicator 12, 1BETLED14 that notifies that the bet number is set by 1 by lighting, 2BETLED15 that notifies that the bet number is set by 2 and 2 that the bet number is set by 3 3BET LED 16 to notify, insertion request LED 17 to notify that a medal can be inserted by lighting, start effective LED 18 to notify that the game start operation by the operation of the start switch 7 is effective, wait (the previous game start) Waiting for the start of reel rotation because a certain period has not elapsed since Weight in LED19 for notifying by lighting a a is that during the game display section 13 in the replay LED20 is provided for informing is provided by lighting the effect that during replay game, which will be described later.

  Inside the MAXBET switch 6, there is provided a BET switch valid LED 21 (see FIG. 7) for notifying that the betting number setting operation by the operation of the MAXBET switch 6 is valid, and stop switches 8L, 8C, The left, middle, and right stop valid LEDs 22L, 22C, and 22R (see FIG. 7) for notifying that the reel stop operation by the corresponding stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is effective are provided inside the 8R. It has been.

  Inside the front door 1b, there is a reset switch 23 for detecting a reset operation for releasing an error state described later and a stop state described later by a predetermined key operation, while changing a set value and confirming a set value described later. The set value display 24 that displays the set value at that time, and the validity / invalidity of the stop function for controlling the stop state at the end of the BB, which will be described later (a state in which the progress of the game is restricted until a reset operation is performed) A check switch 36a for selecting the automatic settlement function that controls automatic settlement at the end of BB, which will be described later (processing to settle (return) medals stored as credits regardless of the player's operation). An automatic settlement switch 36b for selecting invalidity and a flow path for medals inserted from the medal insertion unit 4 are provided in a hopper tank 34a (see FIG. 5) provided inside the housing 1a. And a medal having a insertion medal sensor 31 for detecting a medal that has been inserted from the medal insertion unit 4 and flowed down to the hopper tank 34a side. A selector (not shown) and a door open detection switch 25 (see FIG. 7) for detecting the open state of the front door 1b are provided.

  As shown in FIG. 5, a reel sensor 33L that can detect the reel reference positions of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, the reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R, and the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, as shown in FIG. , 33C, 33R (see FIG. 7), an external output substrate 1000 for outputting an external output signal, a hopper tank 34a for storing medals inserted from the medal insertion unit 4, and a hopper tank 34a. A hopper unit 34 including a hopper motor 34b for paying out medals from the medal payout opening 9, a payout sensor 34c for detecting medals paid out by driving the hopper motor 34b, and a power supply box 100 are provided.

  On the side of the hopper unit 34, an overflow tank 35 is provided for storing medals overflowing from the hopper tank 34a. Inside the overflow tank 35, a full sensor 35 a made up of a pair of electrically conductive members spaced apart from each other and provided at a height capable of detecting a predetermined amount of stored medals is provided. It is possible to detect that the medal storage amount stored in the inside when it is conductive by contacting through the medal stored in the inside exceeds a predetermined amount, that is, that the overflow tank is full. It has become.

  The front side of the power supply box 100 functions as a setting key switch 37 for switching to a setting change state or a setting confirmation state, and functions as a reset switch for canceling an error state or a stop state in a normal state. There are provided a reset / setting switch 38 that functions as a setting switch for changing a setting value of a winning probability (outtake rate) of internal lottery to be described later, and a power switch 39 that is operated when the power is turned on / off. .

  When a game is played in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, first, a medal is inserted from the medal insertion unit 4 or a bet number is set using a credit. To use the credit, the MAXBET switch 6 may be operated. When a stipulated number of bets determined according to the gaming state is set, the pay lines L1 to L5 (see FIG. 4) become valid and the operation of the start switch 7 is valid, that is, the game can be started. It becomes a state. In the present embodiment, when the prescribed number of bets is set to three regardless of the gaming state and the prescribed number of bets is set, the pay lines L1 to L5 become valid. In addition, when a medal is inserted exceeding the maximum number out of the prescribed number corresponding to the gaming state, the amount is added to the credit.

  The winning line is a line that is set to determine whether a combination of symbols displayed on the perspective windows 3 of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is a winning symbol combination. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 4, the winning line L1 set across the symbols arranged in the middle stage of each reel 2L, 2C, 2R and the symbols arranged in the upper stage of each reel 2L, 2C, 2R are displayed. The winning line L2 set across the reels 2L, 2C and 2R, the winning line L3 set over the lower symbols, the upper stage of the reel 2L, the middle stage of the reel 2C, the lower stage of the reel 2R, that is, lower right There are 5 types of winning lines L4 set across straddling symbols, the lower line of reel 2L, the middle part of reel 2C, the upper part of reel 2R, that is, the winning line L5 set straddling the symbols lined up to the right It is defined as a line.

  When the start switch 7 is operated in a state where the game can be started, the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R rotate, and the symbols of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R continuously vary. When any one of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is operated in this state, the rotation of the corresponding reels 2L, 2C, 2R is stopped, and the display result is derived and displayed on the fluoroscopic window 3.

  Then, when all the reels 2L, 2C, 2R are stopped, one game is completed, and a combination of symbols (hereinafter also referred to as roles) that are validated and predetermined on the winning line is each reel 2L, 2C, 2R. When the display result is stopped, a winning occurs, and a predetermined number of medals are awarded to the player and added to the credit. Further, when the credit reaches the upper limit number (50 in the present embodiment), medals are paid out directly from the medal payout opening 9 (see FIG. 4). In addition, when a combination of symbols with payout of medals is arranged on a plurality of winning lines that are activated, the number of payouts determined for each of the combinations of symbols that are activated and aligned on the winning line is totaled, The total number of medals will be awarded to the player. However, an upper limit (15 in this embodiment) is set for the number of medals to be awarded in one game. When the total number of medals exceeds the upper limit, the upper limit number of medals is awarded. The Rukoto. In addition, when the combination of symbols accompanied by the transition of the gaming state is stopped as a display result of each reel 2L, 2C, 2R on the winning line, the gaming state is shifted according to the combination of symbols. ing.

  FIG. 7 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the slot machine 1. As shown in FIG. 7, the slot machine 1 is provided with a game control board 40, an effect control board 90, and a power supply board 101. The game state is controlled by the game control board 40, and the game state is controlled by the effect control board 90. The production according to the control is controlled, and the power supply board 101 generates the drive power for the electrical components constituting the slot machine 1 and supplies them to each part.

  The power supply board 101 is supplied with AC100V power from the outside, and from this AC100V power supply, a DC voltage necessary for driving electrical components constituting the slot machine 1 is generated, and the game control board 40 and the game control board 40 are generated. It is supplied to the production control board 90 connected through the.

  Further, the above-described hopper motor 34b, payout sensor 34c, full sensor 35a, setting key switch 37, reset / setting switch 38, and power switch 39 are connected to the power supply board 101.

  On the game control board 40, the above-described MAXBET switch 6, start switch 7, stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R, settlement switch 10, reset switch 23, stop switch 36a, automatic settlement switch 36b, insertion medal sensor 31, door open The detection switch 25 and reel sensors 33L, 33C, and 33R are connected, and the above-described payout sensor 34c, full sensor 35a, setting key switch 37, and reset / setting switch 38 are connected via the power supply board 101. Detection signals from these connected switches are input.

  Further, the game control board 40 includes the credit display 11, the game auxiliary display 12, the game display unit 13, 1-3 BET LEDs 14-16, the insertion request LED 17, the start valid LED 18, the waiting LED 19, the replaying LED 20, BET switch effective LED 21, left, middle, right stop effective LEDs 22L, 22C, 22R, set value display 24, flow path switching solenoid 30, reel motors 32L, 32C, 32R are connected, and via power supply board 101 The above-described hopper motor 34b is connected, and these electric components are driven based on control of a main control unit 41 (described later) mounted on the game control board 40.

  The game control board 40 includes a microcomputer having a main CPU 41a, a ROM 41b, a RAM 41c, and an I / O port 41d. The main control unit 41 that controls the game, a predetermined range (0 to 65535 in this embodiment) Detects a detection signal input from a random number circuit 42 that generates a random number, a pulse oscillator 43 that supplies a clock signal having a constant frequency to the random number circuit 42, and switches connected to the game control board 40 directly or via the power supply board 101. A switch detection circuit 44, a motor drive circuit 45 that controls the drive of the reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R, a solenoid drive circuit 46 that controls the drive of the flow path switching solenoid 30, various displays connected to the game control board 40, An LED drive circuit 47 that controls the drive of the LED and the power supplied to the slot machine 1 When the voltage is monitored and a voltage drop is detected, a power interruption detection circuit 48 that outputs a voltage drop signal indicating that to the main control unit 41, an initialization command is not input when the power is turned on or from the main CPU 41a A reset circuit 49 for providing a reset signal to the main CPU 41a and various other devices and circuits are sometimes mounted.

  The main CPU 41a has an interrupt function (including an interrupt prohibition function) such as a timekeeping function and a timer interrupt, executes a program (described later) stored in the ROM 41b, and performs processing related to the progress of the game. Each part of the control circuit mounted on the game control board 40 is controlled directly or indirectly. The ROM 41b stores fixed data such as programs executed by the main CPU 41a and various tables. The RAM 41c is used as a work area when the main CPU 41a executes a program. The I / O port 41d inputs / outputs a control signal to / from each circuit connected via a signal input / output terminal included in the main control unit 41.

  Further, the main control unit 41 is supplied with backup power even during a power failure, and the data stored in the RAM 41c is held while the backup power is being supplied.

  The main CPU 41a repeatedly loops the process according to the control state until the detection state of the various switches connected to the game control board 40 is changed as a basic process, and step by step according to the change of the detection state of the various switches. Execute the process to move to. Further, the main CPU 41a has an interrupt function as described above, and can interrupt the basic process by the occurrence of the interrupt and execute the interrupt process. The voltage output from the power interruption detection circuit 48 The power interruption interrupt process (main) is executed in response to the input of the decrease signal, and the timer interrupt process (main) is executed at regular time intervals (about 0.56 ms in the present embodiment). In addition, the execution interval of the timer interrupt process (main) is set to a time longer than the sum of the time required to complete the repeated process according to the control state in the basic process and the execution time of the timer interrupt process (main) Therefore, the process that is repeated according to the control state between the current and next timer interrupt processes (main) is completed at least once.

  The main CPU 41a transmits various commands to the effect control board 90 via the I / O port 41d. A command transmitted from the game control board 40 to the effect control board 90 is sent in only one direction, and no command is sent from the effect control board 90 to the game control board 40. The transmission line of the command transmitted from the game control board 40 to the effect control board 90 is composed of a strobe (INT) signal line, a data transmission line, and a ground line, and is connected via the effect relay board 80. The game control board 40 and the effect control board 90 are not directly connected.

  In the present embodiment, the game control board 40 and the effect control board 90 are connected via the effect relay board 80, but the game control board 40 and the effect control board 90 may be directly connected. good.

  An effect switch 56 is connected to the effect control board 90, and a detection signal of the effect switch 56 is input.

  Further, the effect control board 90 includes a liquid crystal display 51 (see FIG. 4), an effect LED 52, speakers 53 and 54 (see FIG. 35) disposed on the front door 1b of the slot machine 1, and the reel LED 55 described above. Production devices are connected, and these production devices are driven based on control by a later-described sub-control unit 91 mounted on the production control board 90.

  In the present embodiment, the sub-control unit 91 mounted on the effect control board 90 controls the output of the effect devices such as the liquid crystal display 51, effect effect LED 52, speakers 53 and 54, and reel LED 55. However, an output control unit that directly controls the output of the effect device is mounted on the effect control board 90 or another board separately from the sub control part 91, and the sub control part 91 is based on a command from the main control part 41. The output pattern of the effect device may be determined, and the output control unit may control the output of the effect device based on the output pattern determined by the sub control unit 91. In such a configuration, the sub control unit 91 and the output The output control of the effect device is performed by both of the control units.

  Moreover, in this Embodiment, although the liquid crystal display 51, the effect effect LED52, the speakers 53 and 54, and the reel LED55 are illustrated as an effect device, an effect device is not restricted to these, For example, it drives mechanically. A display device or a mechanically driven item may be applied as the rendering device.

Similar to the main control unit 41, the effect control board 90 includes a sub CPU 91a, ROM 91b, RAM 91c, and a microcomputer provided with an I / O port 91d. The sub control unit 91 controls the effect, and the effect control board 90. A display control circuit 92 that performs display control of the liquid crystal display 51 connected to the LED, an LED driving circuit 93 that performs drive control of the effect LED 52 and the reel LED 55, an audio output circuit 94 that controls audio output from the speakers 53 and 54, When the power is turned on or when an initialization command from the sub CPU 91a is not input for a certain period of time, a reset circuit 95 that gives a reset signal to the sub CPU 91a and a detection signal input from the effect switch 56 connected to the effect control board 90 are detected. The switch detection circuit 96 outputs time information including date information and time information. The power supply voltage supplied to the timepiece device 97 and the slot machine 1 is monitored, and when a voltage drop is detected, a power drop detection circuit 98 that outputs a voltage drop signal to that effect to the sub CPU 91a, other circuits, etc. , And the sub CPU 91a receives various commands transmitted from the game control board 40 and performs various controls for performing effects, and directly controls each part of the control circuit mounted on the effect control board 90. To control automatically or indirectly.

  Similar to the main CPU 41a, the sub CPU 91a has an interrupt function (including an interrupt prohibition function). One of the interrupt terminals of the sub control unit 91 is connected to a strobe (INT) signal line that is output when the main control unit 41 transmits a command, among the command transmission lines, and the sub CPU 91a receives the strobe signal. An interrupt is generated based on the input to acquire a command from the main control unit 41 and execute a command reception interrupt process to be stored in the buffer. Further, the sub CPU 91a executes an interrupt process (sub) to be described later by generating an interrupt every time the number of clock inputs reaches a certain number, that is, every certain interval. One of the interrupt terminals of the sub-control unit 91 is connected to the power interruption detection circuit 98, and the sub CPU 91a responds to the input of the voltage drop signal output from the power interruption detection circuit 98. Execute processing (sub). Further, when an unused interrupt occurs in the sub CPU 91a, an unused interrupt process for immediately returning to the original process is executed.

  The sub-control unit 91 is also supplied with backup power at the time of a power failure, and the data stored in the RAM 91c is held while the backup power is supplied.

  In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the medal payout rate changes according to the set value. Specifically, the medal payout rate is changed by using a winning probability corresponding to a set value in an internal lottery described later. The set value is composed of 6 levels of 1 to 6, with 6 being the highest payout rate and the payout rate being lower as the value is decreased in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, 1. That is, when 6 is set as the set value, the advantage is highest for the player, and as the value decreases in order of 5, 4, 3, 2, 1, the advantage decreases stepwise.

  In order to change the setting value, it is necessary to turn on the power of the slot machine 1 after the setting key switch 37 is turned on. When the setting key switch 37 is turned on and the power is turned on, the setting value read from the RAM 41c is displayed on the setting value display 24 as a display value, and the setting value can be changed by operating the reset / setting switch 38. Transition to the setting change state. When the reset / setting switch 38 is operated in the setting change state, the display value displayed on the setting value display 24 is updated one by one (when further operation is performed from the setting 6, the display returns to the setting 1). . When the start switch 7 is operated, the display value is determined as the set value. Then, when the setting key switch 37 is turned OFF, the determined display value (setting value) is stored in the RAM 41c of the main control unit 41, and the state shifts to a state in which the game can proceed.

  In order to confirm the set value, after the game is over, the setting key switch 37 may be turned on with no bet amount set. When the setting key switch 37 is turned on in such a situation, the setting value read out from the RAM 41c is displayed on the setting value display 24, thereby shifting to a setting confirmation state in which the setting value can be confirmed. In the setting confirmation state, the game cannot be progressed, and by turning the setting key switch 37 to the OFF state, the setting confirmation state is ended and the state in which the game can proceed is returned.

  In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the main CPU 41a detects a voltage drop signal from the power interruption detection circuit 48, power interruption interruption processing (main) is executed. In the power interruption interrupt processing (main), the register is saved in a stack of a RAM 41c, which will be described later, and data for destructive diagnosis (5AH in this embodiment) in which any bit is 1 in the RAM 41c, that is, a specification other than 0 The RAM parity adjustment data is calculated so that the RAM parity based on the data stored in all the areas of the RAM 41c becomes 0, and stored in the RAM 41c. Note that the RAM parity is a value calculated as an exclusive OR of values stored in each bit of the corresponding area (all areas in the present embodiment) of the RAM 41c. Therefore, if the RAM parity based on the data stored in all areas of the RAM 41c is 0, the RAM parity adjustment data is 0, and the RAM parity based on the data stored in all areas of the RAM 41c is 1. In this case, the RAM parity adjustment data is 1.

  The main CPU 41a calculates the RAM parity based on the data stored in all areas of the RAM 41c at the time of activation, confirms the value of the destructive diagnosis data, the RAM parity is 0, and the destructive diagnosis The processing state of the main CPU 41a is restored to the state before the power interruption based on the data stored in the RAM 41c on the condition that the value of the data for use is correct, but the RAM parity is not 0 (in the case of 1) or is destroyed. If the value of the diagnostic data is not correct, it is determined that the RAM is abnormal, and the RAM abnormal error code is set in the register to control the RAM abnormal error state so that the progress of the game is disabled. Unlike the other error states, the RAM abnormal error state is not canceled even if the reset switch 23 or the reset / setting switch 38 is operated, and a new set value is set in the setting change state described above. It will not be released until

  In the present embodiment, all data stored in the RAM 41c is held by the backup power source even in the event of a power failure, and when the main CPU 41a determines that the data in the RAM 41c is normal when the power is turned on. The configuration is such that the control state before power interruption is restored based on the data stored in the RAM 41c, but only the data required for the control state restoration in the event of a power failure is backed up among the data stored in the RAM 41c and the power is turned on. It is good also as a structure which returns to the control state before a power failure based on the data backed up in.

  In addition, when returning to the control state before the power interruption when the power is turned on, it is not necessary to return all the control states to the control state before the power interruption, and the minimum control state that does not disadvantage the player For example, it is not necessary to restore the state of all input ports to the state before power interruption.

  In addition, when the sub CPU 91a detects the voltage drop signal from the power interruption detection circuit 98, the sub CPU 91a also executes a power interruption interrupt process (sub). In the power interruption interrupt processing (sub), the register is saved in a stack of a RAM 91c described later, and destructive diagnosis data in which any bit is 1 is stored in the RAM 91c, and data stored in all areas of the RAM 91c. The RAM parity adjustment data is calculated so that the RAM parity based on 0 becomes 0 and stored in the RAM 91c.

  Then, the sub CPU 91a calculates the RAM parity based on the data stored in all areas of the RAM 91c at the time of activation, and based on the data stored in the RAM 91c on the condition that the RAM parity is 0. The processing state of the sub CPU 91a is restored to the state before the power interruption. If the RAM parity is not 0 (1), it is determined that the RAM is abnormal and the RAM 91c is initialized. In this case, unlike the main sub CPU 91a, the execution of the performance is not disabled only by initializing the RAM 91c.

  In the present embodiment, all data stored in the RAM 91c is held by the backup power source even during a power failure, and the sub CPU 91a determines that the data in the RAM 91c is normal when the power is turned on. The configuration is such that the control state before power interruption is restored based on the data stored in the RAM 91c, but only the data required for the control state restoration in the event of a power failure is backed up among the data stored in the RAM 91c, and the power is turned on. It is good also as a structure which returns to the control state before a power failure based on the data backed up in.

  In addition, when returning to the control state before the power interruption when the power is turned on, it is not necessary to return all the control states to the control state before the power interruption, and the minimum control state that does not disadvantage the player It is not necessary to restore the state of the input port or the progress in the middle of the production when it is interrupted. For example, while backing up only data indicating the gaming state such as whether it is in the BB or the normal gaming state, other than the effect corresponding to the gaming state (the effect during the BB during the BB, the normal effect when in the normal gaming state) If a power outage occurs during the execution of a specific production (such as a small role announcement), it will be backed up when the power is turned on instead of resuming the specific production that was being performed at the next power-on. An effect corresponding to the gaming state being played may be executed from the beginning.

  Next, initialization of the RAM 41c of the main control unit 41 will be described. The storage area of the RAM 41c of the main control unit 41 is divided into an important work, a general work, a special work, a set value work, a stop phase work, a non-saved work, an unused area, and a stack area.

  The important work is a work in which data that is inconvenient to be initialized at the end of the BB, such as various display devices and LED display data, input / output data of the I / O port 41d, and a game time clock counter, is stored. The general work is a work that stores data that can be initialized at the end of the BB, such as a stop control table, a stop symbol, the number of medals paid out, and the total number of medals paid out in the BB. The special work is a work that stores data to be initialized only before the start of setting, such as data for transmitting a command to the effect control board 90 and various software random numbers. The set value work is a work in which a set value used when performing a lottery in the internal lottery process is stored. After initializing 0 before setting is started (before shifting to the setting change mode), 1 is stored. The set value that is corrected and newly set at the end of the setting (when the setting change mode is ended) is stored. The stop phase work is a work in which data indicating the stop phase of the reel motors 32L, 32C, 32R is stored, and data indicating the stop phase is stored when the reel motors 32L, 32C, 32R are stopped. The Rukoto. The unsaved work is a work that holds the state of various switches, and a value is always set regardless of whether or not the data in the RAM 41c is destroyed at the time of activation. The unused area is an unused area in the storage area of the RAM 41c, and is initialized if any one of a plurality of initialization conditions described later is satisfied. The stack area is an area in which data saved from the register of the main CPU 41a is stored, and the unused stack area is established by any one of a plurality of initialization conditions to be described later, like the unused area. In this case, the used stack area is not initialized because the program continues.

  In the present embodiment, the main CPU 41a starts up when both the setting key switch 37 and the reset / setting switch 38 are ON, when a RAM error occurs, or when only the setting key switch 37 is ON. When the BB ends, when the setting key switch 37 and the reset / setting switch 38 are both turned off and the data in the RAM 41c is not destroyed, six initialization conditions at the end of one game are satisfied. At this time, five types of initializations in different regions to be initialized are performed according to each initialization condition.

  Initialization 0 is performed when the setting key switch 37 and the reset / setting switch 38 are both ON at the time of start-up, and initialization is performed before the transition to the setting change mode or when a RAM abnormality error occurs. In initialization 0, all areas (including the unused area and the unused stack area) of the storage area of the RAM 41c other than the used stack area are initialized. Initialization 1 is an initialization performed only when the setting key switch 37 is in an ON state at the time of start-up and shifts to the setting change mode. In the initialization 1, in the storage area of the RAM 41c, All areas (including the unused area and the unused stack area) other than the in-use stack area and the stop phase work are initialized. Initialization 2 is initialization performed at the end of the BB. In initialization 2, the general work, the unused area, and the unused stack area are initialized in the storage area of the RAM 41c. Initialization 3 is an initialization performed when both the setting key switch 37 and the reset / setting switch 38 are in an OFF state at the time of activation, and the data in the RAM 41c is not destroyed. The stored work, unused area, and unused stack area are initialized. Initialization 4 is initialization performed at the end of one game. In initialization 4, an unused area and an unused stack area in the storage area of the RAM 41c are initialized.

  In this embodiment, initialization 0 and initialization 1 are performed before transition to the setting change mode. However, they may be performed at the end of the setting change mode, that is, after the setting is confirmed. In this case, if the set value work is initialized, the determined set value is lost. Therefore, the set value work is not initialized.

  In the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the prescribed number of bets that can be set according to the gaming state is determined as described above, and the prescribed number of bets that are determined according to the gaming state is set. It becomes possible to start the game on the condition. In the present embodiment, as will be described later, there are a regular bonus (hereinafter referred to as RB) and a normal gaming state as a gaming state, and 3 is defined as the prescribed number of bets in any gaming state. Thus, regardless of the gaming state, when 3 is set as the bet number, the game can be started. In the present embodiment, all of the pay lines L1 to L5 are activated when a specified number of bets corresponding to the gaming state are set.

  In the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when all reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are stopped, a combination of symbols called a combination is arranged on an activated pay line (hereinafter simply referred to as a pay line). Winning a prize. The combination may be a combination of the same symbols or a combination including different symbols. The type of winning combination is determined according to the game state, but it can be roughly divided into a small role with payout of medals and a replay that can start the next game without the need to set the number of bets. There are a game combination and a special combination with a transition of the game state. Below, a small role and a re-playing role are collectively called a general role. In order for winning of each combination determined according to the gaming state to occur, it is necessary to win an internal lottery to be described later and set a winning flag of the combination in the RAM 41c.

  Of the winning flags for each of these combinations, the winning flag for the small role and the re-playing role is valid only in the game in which the flag is set, and is invalid in the next game. It is valid until a combination of combinations permitted by the flag is completed, and is invalid in a game having a combination of combinations permitted. In other words, once the special combination winning flag is won, even if the combination of the combinations permitted by the flag cannot be made, the winning flag is not invalidated and is carried over to the next game. It becomes.

  As the role in this slot machine 1, as shown in FIG. 8, a regular bonus as a special role (hereinafter, the regular bonus is RB), a big bonus (1) (2) (hereinafter, a big bonus is BB (1) (2)), watermelon, cherry, and bell are defined as small roles, and replay is defined as a replay role.

  In any gaming state, a cherry is placed on any of the winning lines on the left reel when a combination of “cherry-ANY-bell” or “cherry-ANY-replay” is aligned, that is, on the left reel. When the “Cherry” symbol is derived and the “Bell” or “Replay” symbol is derived on the winning line of the right reel where “Cherry” is stopped on the left reel, it becomes a prize and two medals are paid out. .

  The watermelon is awarded when the combination of “watermelon-watermelon-watermelon” is aligned on any of the winning lines in any gaming state, and 15 medals are paid out.

  The bell is awarded when a combination of “bell-bell-bell” is arranged on any of the winning lines in any gaming state, and 12 medals are paid out.

  Replay is awarded when the combination of “Replay-Replay-Replay” is aligned on the winning line in the normal gaming state. When the replay wins, no medals are paid out, but the next game can be started without setting the number of wagers again, so that three medals corresponding to the number of wagers that are not required to be set in the next game are paid out. Is essentially the same.

  RB is awarded when a combination of “net 7-net 7-black 7” is aligned on any of the winning lines in a gaming state other than RB, and the gaming state shifts to RB. The RB is a gaming state that is advantageous to the player over other gaming states by increasing the winning probability of the small role, especially the bell, and when the 12 games are digested after the RB starts, or a 4-game winning ( When the type of a combination is allowed), it ends either whichever comes first.

  BB (1) is awarded when a combination of “black 7-black 7-black 7” is aligned on any of the winning lines in a gaming state other than RB. BB (2) wins when a combination of “network 7-network 7-network 7” is aligned on any of the winning lines in a gaming state other than RB.

  When BB (1) (2) wins, the gaming state shifts to BB and simultaneously shifts to RB. When RB ends, if BB has not ended, it shifts to RB again and BB ends. Control is repeated until RB. That is, during BB, it is always controlled to RB. The BB ends when the total number of medals paid out to the player in the BB exceeds 480. At the end of the BB, the RB is also ended regardless of whether or not the RB end condition is satisfied.

  Hereinafter, the internal lottery of the present embodiment will be described. In the internal lottery, it is determined whether or not the above winning combination is permitted before the display results of all the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are derived and displayed (actually, when the start switch 7 is detected). To do. In the internal lottery, first, a random number for internal lottery (an integer from 0 to 65535) is acquired. Then, for each combination determined according to the gaming state and whether or not the special combination is carried over, the acquired random number for internal lottery and the number of judgment values for each combination determined according to the gaming state, the number of bets and the set value Is done according to.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 9, the role becomes a subject of internal lottery depending on whether the gaming state is the normal gaming state or RB (BB), and the special gaming state is different in the normal gaming state. The subject of the internal lottery also differs depending on whether or not the role is being carried over (normal: normal game state in which special role is not carried over, winning: normal game state in which special role is carried over).

  RB, BB (1), BB (2), RB + watermelon, RB + cherry, BB (1) + watermelon, BB (1) if the gaming state is the normal gaming state and the special role is not carried over + Cherry, BB (2) + Watermelon, BB (2) + Cherry, Replay, Watermelon, Cherry, and Bell are sequentially read out as the subject combination of the internal lottery.

  If the gaming state is the normal gaming state and the special combination is carried over, the replay, watermelon, cherry, and bell are sequentially read out as the target combinations for the internal lottery.

  If the gaming state is RB (BB), watermelon, cherry, and bell are sequentially read out as the subject combination of the internal lottery.

  In the internal lottery, the number of determination values determined corresponding to the role to be subject to the internal lottery, the current gaming state and the set value are sequentially added to the random number for the internal lottery, and when the result of addition overflows, It is determined that the winning combination has been won. For this reason, a winning combination will be won with a probability (number of determination values / 65536) according to the number of determination values.

  In the internal lottery, when any winning combination is determined, a winning flag corresponding to the winning combination is set in the internal winning flag storing work assigned to the RAM 41c. The internal winning flag storage work consists of a 2-byte storage area, of which the upper byte is assigned as the special role storing work in which the winning flag for the special role is set, and the lower byte is the winning of the general role It is assigned as a general role storage work for which a flag is set. Specifically, when a special combination is won, a special combination winning flag indicating that the special combination is won is set in the special combination storing work, and the winning flag set in the general combination storing work is cleared. When a general combination is won, a winning flag for the general combination indicating that the general combination is won is set in the general combination storing work. If no winning combination is selected, only the general winning combination work is cleared.

Next, stop control of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R will be described.
The main CPU 41a refers to the table index and table creation data stored in the ROM 41b when the reel starts rotating and when the reel stops and the reel that is still rotating still remains. Create a stop control table for each reel. When any of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R corresponding to the rotating reel is effectively detected, the stop control table of the corresponding reel is referred to and the slip of the referred stop control table is referred to. Based on the number of frames, control is performed to stop the rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R corresponding to the operated stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R.

  In the table index, an index that indicates the start address of the area in which the data for table creation is stored, from the reference address when referring to the table index, according to the setting state of the winning flag by internal lottery (hereinafter referred to as the internal winning state) Differences up to the address where the data is stored are registered. As a result, a difference corresponding to the internal winning state is acquired, and the corresponding index data can be acquired by adding the difference to the reference address. Even when the winning combinations are different, when the same control is applied, the same address is stored as the index data. In such a case, the same table creation data is referred to. Thus, a stop control table is created.

  The table creation data includes a stop control table indicating the number of sliding frames according to the stop operation position, and an address of the stop control table to be referred to according to the reel stop status.

  The stop control table referred to according to the reel stop status is whether all reels are rotating, only the left reel is stopped, only the middle reel is stopped, only the right reel is stopped, It may vary depending on whether the middle reel is stopped, the left and right reels are stopped, the middle and right reels are stopped, and if any reel is stopped, stop Since there may be differences depending on the stop position of the reels already completed, the address of the stop control table to be referenced for each situation is registered for each rotating reel, and based on the top address of the table creation data, It is possible to specify the address of the stop control table that should be referred to according to the status of each, and it is necessary according to each status from this specified address. And to be able to identify the stop control table. Even when the reel stop status and the stopped position of the stopped reel are different, when the same stop control table is applied, the same address may be registered as the address of the stop control table. In such a case, the same stop control table is referred to.

  The stop control table is data that can specify the number of sliding frames for each timing when the stop operation is performed. In the present embodiment, stepping motors that make one turn at a cycle of 168 steps (0 to 167) are used for the reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R. That is, when the reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R are driven for 168 steps, the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R make one round. 21 areas (frames) divided every 8 steps (the number of steps in which one symbol moves) per reel are defined, and these areas are areas 0 to 20 from the reel reference position. A number is assigned. On the other hand, the number of symbols arranged on one reel is 21, and symbol numbers 0 to 20 from the reel reference position are assigned to symbols on each reel, so symbols 0 to 20 are assigned to each reel. , Area numbers 0 to 20 are assigned in order. In the stop control table, the number of sliding symbols for each area number is compressed and stored according to a predetermined rule, and the number of sliding symbols for each area number can be acquired by expanding the stop control table. Yes.

  As described above, the stop control table created by referring to the table index and the table creation data corresponds to the area number, and the area corresponding to each area number has a stop reference position (in this embodiment, a perspective window). 3 when the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is detected at the timing (the timing in which the number of steps from the reel reference position is included in the range of the number of steps). This is a table in which the number of frames is set.

  Next, the procedure for creating the stop control table will be described. First, at the start of reel rotation, the top address of the table creation data corresponding to the internal winning state of the game is acquired. Specifically, the table index is first referred to, index data corresponding to the internal winning state is obtained, table creation data is identified based on the obtained index data, and all reels are identified from the identified table creation data. The address of the stop control table for each reel corresponding to the state of rotation is acquired, and the stop control table for each reel stored at the acquired address is expanded to generate a stop control table for all reels.

  Further, when any one reel stops or any two reels stop, the index data acquired at the start of reel rotation, that is, the top address of the table creation data corresponding to the internal winning state of the game The table creation data is identified based on the table creation data, and the stop control table address of the unreacted reel corresponding to the stopped reel and the area number of the stop position of the reel is obtained from the identified table creation data. The stop control table for each stored reel is expanded to create a stop control table for the unstopped reels.

  Next, when the main CPU 41a effectively detects any one of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R corresponding to the rotating reel, the control when the display result is derived to the corresponding reel will be described. When one of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R corresponding to the rotating reel is effectively detected, the stop operation position area is determined based on the number of steps from the reel reference position when the stop operation is detected. The number is specified, the stop control table of the reel where the stop operation is detected is referred, and the number of sliding symbols corresponding to the area number of the specified stop operation position is acquired. Then, control is performed to rotate and stop the reel by the number of acquired sliding frames. Specifically, from the number of steps from the reel reference position at the time when the stop operation is detected, the number of steps from the acquired number of sliding frames to the stop is calculated, and the reel is rotated and stopped by the calculated number of steps. Take control. Thus, the region corresponding to the region number that is the stop position ahead of the number of sliding frames from the region corresponding to the region number of the stop operation position where the stop operation is detected is the stop reference position (in this embodiment, the fluoroscopic window 3 The lower symbol area).

  In the table index of the present embodiment, only one address is stored as index data corresponding to one internal winning state in one gaming state, and one table creation data includes one reel. Only one address is stored as the address of the storage area of the stop control table corresponding to the stop status (and the stop position of the stopped reel). In other words, table creation data corresponding to one internal winning state in one gaming state and stop control tables corresponding to reel stop states (and stopped positions of stopped reels) are uniquely determined. The stop control table created with reference to is unique for one internal winning state in one gaming state and the reel stop status (and the stop position of the stopped reel). Therefore, when all of the gaming state, the internal winning state, and the reel stop status (and the stop position of the stopped reel) are the same, the reel is based on the same stop control table, that is, the same control pattern. The stop control is performed.

  Further, in the present embodiment, a value of 0 to 4 is determined as the number of sliding frames, and it is possible to stop the reel by drawing a maximum of 4 frames after detecting a stop operation. In other words, the stop position of the symbol can be designated from a range of a maximum of 5 frames including the stop operation position where the stop operation is detected. In addition, since it is necessary to move one frame to move the reel for one symbol, it is possible to stop the reel by pulling in a maximum of four symbols after detecting the stop operation. The symbol stop position can be designated from a range of up to five symbols including the operation position.

  In the present embodiment, when any of the winning combinations is won, the winning combination is drawn to the maximum of 4 frames on any of the winning lines, and the winning combination is placed on any of the winning lines. Create a stop control table with the number of sliding frames to be drawn so as not to be aligned, and control the stop of the reels. If no winning combination is won, none of the winning combinations are on the winning line A stop control table in which the number of sliding frames is determined is created, and reel stop control is performed. As a result, when a stop operation is performed, if a winning combination can be stopped on any winning line in a drawing range of a maximum of 4 frames, control is performed to align and stop them. In this case, the winning combination is controlled so that the winning combination is stopped within a drawing range of a maximum of 4 frames.

  As shown in FIG. 6, the “bell” on the left reel, the “bell” on the middle reel, and the “bell” on the right reel that make up the bell are arranged at intervals of 4 frames each. Regardless of the timing at which the reels are stopped, the “bell-bell-bell” combination is always on the winning line, and the bell wins. In addition, the “replay” for the left reel, “replay” for the middle reel, and “replay” for the right reel, which are part of the replay, are arranged at intervals of 4 frames each. In any case, the combination of “replay-replay-replay” is always on the winning line and the replay wins.

  On the other hand, the “bell” and “replay” on the right reel that make up the cherry are arranged at intervals of 4 frames or less, but the “cherry” on the left reel that makes up the cherry has an interval exceeding 7 frames. When the cherry is won, the combination of “Cherry-ANY-Bell” or “Cherry-ANY-Replay” will be placed on the winning line if the left reel is stopped at the timing of the “Cherry” pull-in range. The cherries will be won all at once, but if the right reel is stopped at a timing that is outside the “cherry” pull-in range, the cherries will not be won and will be missed.

  In addition, the "watermelon" on the left reel, the "watermelon" on the middle reel, and the "watermelon" on the right reel, which make up the watermelon, are located at intervals of more than 4 frames. If the operation of stopping each reel is performed at the timing of the drawing range, the combination of "watermelon-watermelon-watermelon" will be aligned with the winning line, and the watermelon will win. If the stop operation is performed at a timing outside the range, the watermelon will not be won and will be lost.

  Also, BB (1) to (3) also have locations where the constituent symbols are arranged at intervals exceeding 4 frames, and even if any of BB (1) to (3) wins, the configuration of the winning BB If the reels are stopped at the timing of the symbol drawing range, the winning BB will win, but at any one of the reels, the stopping operation will be performed at a timing outside the winning BB component symbol drawing range. If you do, BB will not win and you will miss it. BB will be carried over to the next game even if it is missed as described above, so if you win BB once, for example, even if you miss it, you will be awarded by performing a stop operation at an appropriate timing after the next game Is possible.

  If the special role is elected while the special role has been carried over from before the previous game, or if the special role and the small role are elected at the same time when the special role is not carried over, the special role and the small role are won simultaneously. The number of sliding symbols is set so that the winning small role is drawn to the winning line within the range of 4 frames, and the winning small role is drawn to the winning line within the range of up to 4 frames. For stop operation positions that cannot be inserted, a stop control table in which the number of sliding symbols is determined so as to draw the selected special combination to the winning line in the range of 4 frames to the maximum is created, and reel stop control is performed. As a result, when a stop operation is performed, if it is possible to stop all the small roles that have been selected in the drawing range of up to 4 frames on the winning line and stop them, control is performed so that the winning combination is stopped. If you can't draw a small role that has been won in the drawing range of up to 4 frames on the line, if you can stop with a special role that has been won in the drawing range of up to 4 frames on the winning line, A control is performed to stop them in a uniform manner, and a winning combination that has not been won will be controlled to be stopped within a 4-frame pull-in range. That is, in such a case, priority is given to the control for aligning the small combination on the winning line over the special combination, and the special combination can be made effective only when the small combination cannot be drawn.

  In this embodiment, when a special combination and a small combination are won simultaneously, priority is given to the control of aligning the small combination on the winning line over the special combination, and only when the small combination cannot be withdrawn. Although it is a configuration that allows a winning combination to be awarded, priority is given to the control of aligning a special winning role on the winning line over a small winning role, and it is possible to win a winning role only when the special winning role cannot be drawn. It is good also as composition which becomes.

  The special role and re-playing role are selected when the re-playing role is elected while the special role has been carried over from before the previous game, or when the special role and re-playing role are won at the same time without the special role being carried over. In the case of winning at the same time, when a stop operation is performed, control is performed so that the symbols of the re-gamer are aligned and stopped on the winning line within a drawing range of a maximum of 4 frames. In this case, the symbols constituting the re-playing combination are arranged within 5 symbols for each of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, that is, with an interval of 4 frames or less. Therefore, if a special combination and a replaying player are elected at the same time, the replaying game will always be awarded regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 8L, 8C and 8R by the player. Will be. That is, in such a case, the control for aligning the re-games on the winning line has priority over the special game, and the re-games will always win.

  In the present embodiment, after the rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R starts, the main CPU 41a continues to rotate the reels for which the stop operation has not yet been detected until the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is detected. Then, on the condition that the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is detected, control is performed to stop the display result on the corresponding reel. Even if the reel rotation temporarily stops due to the occurrence of a reel rotation error, the stop operation is still detected until the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is detected after the reel rotation is restarted. Control is performed to stop the display result of the corresponding reels on the condition that the rotation of the reels that have not been continued is continued and the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is detected.

  In the present embodiment, the control to stop the display result on the corresponding reel is performed on the condition that the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is detected, but the rotation of the reel is started. Then, when a predetermined automatic stop time has elapsed, even if the reel stop operation is not performed, it is assumed that the stop operation has been performed, and automatic stop control is performed to automatically stop each reel. Anyway. In this case, since the reels are stopped without the player's operation, it is preferable to derive a display result that does not constitute any combination even if any combination is won.

  Next, commands that the main CPU 41a transmits to the effect control board 90 will be described.

  In the present embodiment, the main CPU 41a makes a BET command, a credit command, an internal winning command, a reel rotation start command, a reel stop command, a winning determination command, a payout start command, a payout end command, a gaming state to the effect control board 90. A plurality of types of commands including a command, a standby command, an abort command, an error command, a return command, a setting start command, a confirmation start command, a confirmation end command, and an operation detection command are transmitted.

  These commands are composed of 1-byte type data indicating the type of command and 1-byte extension data indicating the content of the command, and the sub CPU 91a can determine the type of command from the type data.

  The BET command is a command that can specify the number of inserted medals, that is, the number of medals used to set the bet number, and is a state from the end of the game (after setting change) to the start of the game. Sent when a medal is inserted or the MAXBET switch 6 is operated to set the number of bets in a state where is not set. Further, since the BET command is transmitted when the betting number setting operation is performed, it is possible to specify that the betting number setting operation has been performed by receiving the BET command.

  The credit command is a command that can specify the number of medals stored as credits, and is a state from the end of the game (after setting change) to the start of the game, and in a state where a predetermined number of bets is set, Sent when a medal is inserted and credits are added.

  The internal winning command is a command that can specify the winning status of the internal winning flag and the type of the internal winning flag that has been established, and is transmitted when the start switch 7 is operated to start the game. Further, since the internal winning command is transmitted when the start switch 7 is operated, it is possible to specify that the start switch 7 has been operated by receiving the internal winning command.

  The reel rotation start command is a command for notifying the start of reel rotation, and is transmitted when rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is started.

  The reel stop command is a command that can specify whether the reel to be stopped is the left reel, the middle reel, or the right reel, the area number of the corresponding reel stop operation position, and the area number of the corresponding reel stop position. And is transmitted each time stop control is performed in accordance with the stop operation of each reel. Since the reel stop command is transmitted when the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R are operated, it is possible to specify that the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R are operated by receiving the reel stop command. .

  The winning determination command is a command that can specify the presence / absence of winning, the type of winning, and the number of medals to be paid out at the time of winning, and is transmitted after all the reels are stopped and the winning determination is performed.

  The payout start command is a command for notifying the start of payout of medals, and is transmitted when the payout of medals is started by paying out a prize or credit (including medals used for setting the number of bets). The payout end command is a command for notifying the end of payout of medals, and is transmitted when the payout of medals by winning and winning a credit is completed.

  The game state command is a command that can specify the game state of the next game, and is transmitted when the setting change state ends and when the game ends.

  The standby command is a command indicating a transition to the standby state, and after one game is over, a credit (which was used for setting the bet number) is set when the transition to the standby state is made after a predetermined time without setting the bet number. (Including medals) is sent out after the medal payout is completed and the payout end command is sent.

  The stop command is a command indicating the occurrence or release of the stop state, and after the end of the BB, the stop command indicating the occurrence of the stop state is transmitted when the ending effect waiting time has elapsed, and the reset operation is performed. When the stop state is released, a stop command indicating the release of the stop state is transmitted.

  An error command is a command that indicates the occurrence or cancellation of an error condition and the type of error condition. When an error is determined and controlled to an error condition, an error command indicating the occurrence and type of the error condition is sent and reset. When the error state is canceled after the operation is performed, an error command indicating the cancellation of the error state is transmitted.

  The return command is a command indicating that the main CPU 41 has returned to the control state before the power interruption, and is transmitted when the main CPU 41a is restored to the control state before the power interruption.

  The setting start command is a command indicating the start of the setting change state, and is transmitted when shifting to the setting change state. Further, since the control state of the main CPU 41 is initialized with the transition to the setting change state, it can be specified that the control state of the main CPU 41 has been initialized by the setting start command.

  The confirmation start command is a command indicating the start of the setting confirmation state, and is transmitted when shifting to the setting confirmation state. The confirmation end command is a command indicating the end of the setting confirmation state, and is transmitted when the setting confirmation state ends.

  The operation detection command is a command indicating the detection state (ON / OFF) of operation switches (MAXBET switch 6, start switch 7, stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R), and is transmitted at regular intervals.

  Among these commands, a setting start command, an error command indicating a RAM abnormality, and a return command are generated at a stage before an interrupt is permitted in the startup process and stored in a specific command transmission buffer assigned to a special work in the RAM 41c. And sent immediately.

  Commands other than a setting start command, an error command indicating a RAM abnormality, a return command, and an operation detection command are generated according to the progress of the game in the game process, and are temporarily stored in a normal command transmission buffer provided in a special work in the RAM 41c. Stored and transmitted in timer interrupt processing (main).

  In the present embodiment, a command is generated in the game process and stored in the normal command transmission buffer. When an untransmitted command stored in the command transmission buffer is detected in the command transmission processing in the timer interrupt 2, the untransmitted command stored in the normal command transmission buffer is transmitted.

  In addition, the normal command transmission buffer has an area where a plurality of commands can be stored, so that newly generated commands can be stored without waiting for transmission of unsent commands stored in the normal command transmission buffer. Normally, it can be stored in an empty area of the command transmission buffer. That is, a plurality of commands can be stored in the normal command transmission buffer.

  In addition, when commands are stored in the normal command transmission buffer in the game process, these commands are stored in the order of generation, and in the command transmission process, the commands are transmitted in the order generated and stored in the normal command transmission buffer. It has become. That is, the commands stored in the normal command transmission buffer are transmitted in the order in which they are generated and stored.

  The operation detection command is generated every time the command transmission process is executed five times, stored in the aforementioned specific command transmission buffer, and immediately transmitted. In addition, when the operation detection command transmission time is reached with the unsent command stored in the normal command transmission buffer, priority is given to the transmission of the operation detection command and the normal command transmission buffer stores it. The untransmitted command is transmitted in the next command transmission process, and a plurality of commands are not transmitted in one command transmission process.

  Next, the control of the effect performed by the sub control unit 91 based on a command transmitted from the main CPU 41a to the effect control board 90 will be described.

  The sub CPU 91a executes a command reception interrupt process when a strobe signal indicating the transmission of a command from the main CPU 41a is input. In the command reception interrupt process, the command acquired from the command transmission line is stored in the reception buffer provided in the RAM 91c.

  In the timer interrupt process (sub), the sub CPU 91a determines whether or not an unprocessed command is stored in the reception buffer. If an unprocessed command is stored, the sub CPU 91a is the earliest stage. Based on the received command, the control pattern table stored in the ROM 91b is referred to. Based on the control contents registered in the control pattern table, various effects such as the liquid crystal display 51, the effect LED 52, the speakers 53 and 54, the reel LED 55, etc. Control the output of the device.

  In the control pattern table, the display pattern of the liquid crystal display 51 corresponding to the type of command, the lighting mode of the lighting effect LED 52, the output mode of the speakers 53 and 54, the lighting mode of the reel LED, etc. The control patterns of these effect devices are registered, and when the sub CPU 91a receives the command, the sub CPU 91a, among the control patterns registered corresponding to the effect patterns set in the RAM 91c in the game of the control pattern table, With reference to the control pattern corresponding to the type of command received, output control of the rendering device is performed based on the control pattern. Thereby, the production according to the production pattern and the progress of the game is executed.

  If the sub CPU 91a receives a new command during execution of an effect triggered by the reception of a certain command, the sub CPU 91a stops the effect based on the control pattern being executed, and responds to the newly received command. An effect based on the control pattern is executed. In other words, even if the production is not finished to the end, when a new command is received, the production that was being executed is canceled and a new command is received unless the received new command is not a command that triggers a new production. An effect based on the command is executed.

  In particular, in the present embodiment, when a betting number setting operation is performed during execution of an effect, that is, when the sub CPU 91a receives a BET command indicating that the betting number has been set, the effect being executed is displayed. It is supposed to cancel. For this reason, if the player wants to proceed to the next game rather than seeing the production to the end, the production is canceled and the next game can be started. There is no. Further, when a credit or bet amount adjustment operation is performed during the performance, that is, after the sub CPU 91a receives a game state command indicating the end of the game, and before receiving an internal winning command indicating the start of the game. When the payout start command is received, the performance being executed is stopped. Credits and bets are settled when the game is terminated. In such a case, by terminating the performance that is being executed, there is an intention to end the game, but the performance continues unnecessarily. It is designed not to be overwhelmed.

  When the internal winning command is received, the effect pattern is selected at a selection rate corresponding to the result of the internal lottery indicated by the internal winning command, and is set in the RAM 91c. The selection rate of the effect pattern is registered in the effect table stored in the ROM 91b, and when the sub CPU 91a receives the internal winning command, the sub CPU 91a sets the level and the effect setting described later as a result of the internal lottery indicated by the internal winning command. Accordingly, the selection rate registered in the effect table is referred to, one of the effect patterns is selected from the plurality of types of effect patterns according to the selection rate, and the selected effect pattern is set in the RAM 91c as the effect pattern of the game. Even if the same command is received, a different control pattern is selected depending on the effect pattern selected when the internal winning command is received. As a result, different effects may be performed depending on the effect pattern.

  In the present embodiment, the main CPU 41a transmits an operation detection command that can specify that the MAXBET switch 6, the start switch 7, the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R have been operated to the sub CPU 91a, whereby the sub CPU 91a. However, it is possible to specify that the operation switch detected by the main CPU 41a has been operated regardless of whether the operation switch is involved in the game progress control in each control state. It is possible to produce effects according to operation of operation switches not involved in control, and to operate a main menu screen described later.

  Further, the main CPU 41a determines whether the MAXBET switch 6, the start switch 7, and the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R are operated. By periodically transmitting an operation detection command that can specify the ON / OFF state of the sub CPU 91a, the sub CPU 91a can periodically specify the ON / OFF state of these operation switches. Even if an operation detection command is missed, it is possible to specify the latest detection state for all operation switches based on the operation detection command sent next time, and operation of the operation switches not involved in game progress control It is possible to reliably execute the production according to the situation.

  Further, since it is possible to specify the detection states of all of the MAXBET switch 6, the start switch 7, the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R from the operation detection command, the sub CPU 91a can simultaneously operate a plurality of switches or perform specific operations. It is possible to produce an effect reflecting the operation status of a plurality of operation switches such as an operation of only the switch, and it is possible to produce various effects using the operation of the operation switch.

  In the present embodiment, the main CPU 41a operates regardless of whether any of the MAXBET switch 6, the start switch 7, and the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is operated. The operation detection command that can specify the ON / OFF state of each of 8L, 8C, and 8R is transmitted at regular intervals, but only when the detection state (ON / OFF) of any operation switch changes. An operation detection command indicating that may be transmitted. With such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the transmission of the operation detection command as much as possible and reduce the control load related to the transmission of the operation detection command. In addition, the sub CPU 91a does not need to receive an operation detection command more than necessary.

  Further, when the detection state (ON / OFF) of any operation switch changes, an operation detection command that can specify the detection state of another operation switch in addition to the detection state of the operation switch is sent to the sub CPU 91a. It is also possible to have a configuration for transmission, and with this configuration, transmission of operation detection commands can be reduced as much as possible, and the sub CPU 91a detects the detection state of the operation switch whose detection state has changed from the operation detection command. In addition, the detection state of other operation means can be specified, and the sub CPU 91a can perform effects reflecting the operation statuses of a plurality of operation means. Can be anything.

  In the RAM 91c of the sub-control unit 91, a detection state storage area in which the change state of the detection state of the operation switch is stored for each operation switch, and an operation detection flag indicating that the operation state of the operation switch has changed are provided for each operation switch. An operation detection flag storage area to be stored is allocated. Furthermore, the detection state storage area is assigned with a detection state before receiving the operation detection command (previous) and a detection state after receiving the operation detection command (this time). The detection state of each operation switch before and after reception is stored.

  The sub CPU 91a performs an operation detection process when it is determined in the timer interrupt process (sub) that an unprocessed command is stored in the reception buffer. In the operation detection process, it is determined whether the unprocessed command is an operation detection command. If it is determined that the command is an operation detection command, the current detection state stored in the detection state storage area is changed to the previous detection state. Moved and stored the detection state of each operation switch indicated by the operation detection command as the current detection state, and when there is an operation switch in which the previous detection state and the current detection state are different, changes from OFF to ON In this case, a rising flag is set as an operation detection flag corresponding to the operation switch, and when it is changed from ON to OFF, a falling flag is set as an operation detection flag corresponding to the operation switch.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the main CPU 41a periodically transmits an operation detection command that can specify the detection states of all the operation switches regardless of whether or not the detection state of the operation switches has changed. When the sub CPU 91a receives the operation detection command, the sub CPU 91a updates the detection state of each operation switch before and after receiving the operation detection command stored in the detection state storage area. An operation detection flag corresponding to the operation switch is set, and the sub CPU 91a confirms the presence or absence of the operation detection flag, thereby receiving the operation detection command in addition to the fact that the detection state of the operation switch has changed. How the detection state of each operation switch has changed before and after, that is, whether it has changed from OFF to ON, from ON to OF It has become the one, to be able to determine the changes to.

  For this reason, the sub CPU 91a can perform an effect or change the effect according to not only the timing when the operation of the operation switch is started but also the timing when the operation is released, and is not involved in the progress control of the game. Various effects can be performed according to the operation mode of the operation switch.

  In the present embodiment, the sub CPU 91a can determine how the detection state of each operation switch before and after receiving the operation detection command has changed in addition to the change in the detection state of the operation switch. However, the sub CPU 91a may be configured to be able to determine only that the operation switch has been operated, that is, changed from OFF to ON. With such a configuration, an operation that does not affect the progress control of the game. It is possible to reduce the control load on the sub CPU 91a due to the operation of the switch.

  The detection state storage area stores the detection state of each operation switch, and the sub CPU 91a is set with any operation detection flag, and the change in the detection state of the operation switch corresponding to the operation detection flag is changed. When it is identified, it is possible to identify not only the operation switch whose detection state has changed but also the detection state of other operation switches by checking the detection state of other operation switches in the detection state storage area. .

  For this reason, it is possible to specify a state in which a plurality of operation switches are operated at the same time, and it is possible to produce effects by operating the plurality of operation switches at the same time. Various effects can be produced depending on how the operation switches are operated. It can be performed.

  In addition, when the sub CPU 91a performs an effect by simultaneously operating the left stop switch and the middle stop switch, the left stop switch is detected and the right stop switch is not detected. If an operation of the middle stop switch is detected, the corresponding effect is performed. If both the left stop switch and the right stop switch are detected, and the operation of the middle stop switch is detected, the same as above. In this case, the operation of the left stop switch and the middle stop switch is detected at the same time. In this case, the corresponding effect is not performed.

  That is, when performing a specific operation effect in response to an operation of a specific operation switch, if an operation switch other than the specific operation switch is operated together with the specific operation switch, the specific operation effect is not performed. ing.

  For this reason, a specific operation effect based on an operation of a specific operation switch is performed when the specific operation switch is operated simultaneously with another operation switch or when the other operation switch is operated. Since it is not executed and a specific operation effect is not executed by an erroneous operation, the specific operation effect can be executed only for a player who desires the specific operation effect.

  In addition, when an operation switch other than the specific operation switch is operated together with the specific operation switch as described above, a part of the operation switches for executing each effect by not performing the specific operation effect. Even in the case of overlapping, it is possible to execute different effects. That is, one effect is executed by operating the left stop switch and the middle stop switch at the same time, and the other effect is executed by operating the middle stop switch and the right stop switch at the same time. When the middle stop switch is operated while the right stop switch and the right stop switch are operated at the same time, whether the left stop switch and the middle stop switch are operated simultaneously or whether the middle stop switch and the right stop switch are operated simultaneously. It becomes impossible to discriminate, and it becomes impossible to assign effects only to one of the simultaneous operations, but when an operation switch other than a specific operation switch is operated together with a specific operation switch Even if it is a case like the above by not performing a specific operation effect It can be assigned an effect for each of the simultaneous operation as it can be performed more diverse effect by way of the operation of a plurality of operation switches.

  In the present embodiment, the sub CPU 91a gives points on the condition that a predetermined achievement condition is satisfied when a password to be described later is input at the start of the game, and adds a level every time 10 points are acquired. It is like that. Each time the level value exceeds a certain value, the number of types of effects that may be executed is increased. Specifically, it includes an effect table 1 used for levels 1 to 30, an effect table 2 used for levels 31 to 60, and an effect table 3 used for levels 61 to 99. In addition to the effect patterns registered in the table 1, an effect pattern that is not registered in the effect table 1 is defined, and the effect table 3 includes an effect pattern that is registered in the effect tables 1 and 2. An effect pattern not registered in Tables 1 and 2 is defined, and the level exceeds 30 by selecting an effect pattern using the effect table corresponding to the current level among the effect tables 1 to 3. In this case, when the number exceeds 60, the production pattern increases.

  Also, every time the level value exceeds a certain value, the items that can be selected as the effect setting are increased. Specifically, the frequency of the production (production setting 1), the main character (production setting 2), the costume of the character (production setting 3), the background design of the production (production setting 4), BGM (production) Setting 5) can be selected. In these production settings, three types can be selected until the level exceeds 30, and when the level exceeds 30, five types can be selected. Selectable from types.

  As an achievement condition to which points are given, for example, as shown in FIG. 10, when a continuous performance indicating the possibility of winning a special role is executed and the special role is won or missed, a bonus confirmation screen is displayed. The number of points awarded according to the difficulty level of each achievement condition, the current level, the number of games since the game was started, and the achievement conditions are established. The number of points corresponding to is given.

  The continuous effect B shown in FIG. 10 is an effect indicating that the possibility of winning the special role is higher than the continuous effect A, that is, an effect in which the ratio selected at the time of winning the special role is higher than the continuous effect A. It is an effect whose appearance rate is lower than that of the continuous effect A.

  And if the continuous production A is executed and the special role is not won, and the continuous production B is executed and the special role is not won, the latter gives more points. Even if there is a high possibility that the special role has been won, more points are awarded when the special role is not won.

  Also, if the continuous production A is executed and the special role is not won, and the continuous production A is executed and the special role is won, the latter gives more points. Even if the possibility of winning the special role is low, more points are awarded when the special role is won.

  Moreover, even when the same achievement condition is satisfied, points awarded for 0 to 499G, 500 to 699G, and 700G or more are different, and as the number of games increases, more points are awarded. Yes.

  Further, every time the level value exceeds a certain value, the number of points given is reduced, and the number of points given is reduced. Specifically, when level 30 is exceeded, when level 60 is exceeded, points awarded respectively decrease, and depending on achievement conditions, points are not awarded. For this reason, every time the level exceeds a certain value, it becomes difficult to further increase the level.

  As described above, in the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, points are awarded when the achievement condition according to the result of the game is satisfied, the level increases according to the number of points, and the production pattern increases. The setting items for production increase, and the player's willingness to play a game can be enhanced effectively.

  In addition, there is an effect that is executed on condition that the level is more than a certain level, the cumulative number of games and the cumulative number of bonuses are more than a certain number, and the above-mentioned mission is more than a certain level. , Missions achieved by performing effects that do not appear unless the cumulative number of games or the number of cumulative bonuses exceeds a certain number, that is, the level above a certain level, the number of cumulative games, the number of cumulative bonuses, etc. must be above a certain number Missions that cannot be achieved are defined, and the player's willingness to play and raise the level can be effectively increased.

  In addition, the sub CPU 91a is configured so that a story consisting of a plurality of stages progresses sequentially on the liquid crystal display 51 in accordance with the number of games when a password to be described later is input at the start of the game. Specifically, when the story reaches a certain stage according to the number of games, the story of the next stage is developed.

  In addition, when a password, which will be described later, is input at the start of the game, the sub CPU 91a, when the anniversary specified from the input password indicates a specific anniversary, the anniversary effect ( For example, when the birthday of the player is specified, it is possible to execute an effect that congratulates the player by satisfying certain conditions.

  Further, the value of the level can take over not only the value increased in one slot machine 1 but also the value increased in other slot machines 1. Further, not only the level value but also the stage of the story developed in the other slot machine 1 or when the player changes the production setting in the other slot machine 1, the setting contents can be taken over.

  Specifically, by selecting “password input” from the main menu screen shown in FIG. 11A and inputting the password issued by the management server 1200, the level and story of the previous game history are selected. It becomes possible to play the game by taking over the stage and the production setting.

  As will be described in detail later, the password is character data consisting of eight characters that can specify the anniversary, level, story stage, and production setting according to the player's individual game history managed by the management server 1200 described later. It is.

  The main menu screen is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 when the effect switch 56 is operated in the control state from the end of the game (after the setting change) until the bet amount is set.

  When the main menu screen is displayed, as shown in FIGS. 11A and 11B, the stop switch 8L is operated to move to the left menu item, and the stop switch 8R is operated. To move to the menu item on the right. Then, the menu item displayed in front is selected by operating the effect switch 56. Further, when the effect switch 56 is operated in a state where “End” is displayed in front as a menu item or when the stop switch 8C is operated for a predetermined time or longer, as shown in FIG. An end confirmation screen in which “YES” and “NO” can be selected is displayed. On the end confirmation screen, the stop switches 8L and 8R and the production switch 56 are operated, and “YES” is selected from “YES” and “NO”. Thus, it returns to the basic screen (normal screen before shifting to the main menu screen). In addition, the screen returns to the basic screen when a time determined for each screen elapses without any operation.

  On the main menu screen before password entry or before the game start by simple start, which will be described later, as shown in FIG. 11A, menu items of “easy start”, “password entry”, “member registration”, and “end” are displayed. By selecting the password menu by operating the stop switches 8L and 8R and the effect switch 56 on the main menu screen before the password input or before the game start by the simple start described later, FIG. The password input screen shown in b) is displayed. In the password input screen, as shown in FIG. 12 (c), characters are moved by operating the stop switches 8L and 8R, and as shown in FIG. 13 (a), by operating the effect switch 56, The character displayed in front is selected.

  Each time one character is selected, the next character can be selected. Further, by operating the effect switch 56 in a state where “return one character” is displayed in front, the character in front can be selected again. Then, when the password of 8 characters is selected, it moves to the determination column, and as shown in FIG. 13B, the effect switch 56 is operated in a state where characters other than “return one character” are displayed in front. Thus, the password is determined.

  If the entered password is authenticated as a legitimate password, a password entry OK screen is displayed as shown in FIG. The password input OK screen is switched to the basic screen when the effect switch 56 is operated or a time determined for each screen elapses. If the password is not authenticated as a regular password, a password entry NG screen (not shown) is displayed. The password input NG screen is also switched to the basic screen by operating the effect switch 56 or when a time determined for each screen elapses.

  When the password is authenticated as a legitimate password, the values of the personal history storage area (total number of games, number of BBs, number of RBs, achievement mission) assigned to the RAM 91c are initialized and analyzed from the password. From the password to the anniversary storage area where the anniversary is assigned to the RAM 91c, to the level storage area where the level analyzed from the password is assigned to the RAM 91c, and to the story storage area where the story analyzed from the password is assigned to the RAM 91c. The effect settings 1 to 4 to be analyzed are set in the effect setting storage area assigned to the RAM 91c, and accordingly, the level, story, and effect settings corresponding to the previous game history are taken over. At this time, the input password itself is stored in a password storage area assigned to the RAM 91c.

  Next, the password analysis procedure will be described. In the ROM 91b, as shown in FIG. 16 (a), 0 to 31 corresponding to the characters constituting the password (32 types of Roman letters: 26 types and 6 types of symbols) are provided. A password analysis table in which a numerical value is defined is stored. First, as shown in FIG. 16B, the password analysis table is referred to, and the input password is replaced with the corresponding numerical value. For example, if the password is “KZFJC = U *” as shown in FIG. 16B, “10-25-5-9-2-26-20-” according to the password analysis table shown in FIG. 30 ". Next, the replaced numerical value is converted into a binary number, and the value of the upper 4 bits and lower 2 bits in total 4 bits is specified as a random value (random value acquired when the management server 1200 issued the password), and the random value is excluded The 36-bit value is shifted to the right by a random value. For example, as shown in FIG. 16B, if the random value is 0110 (= 6), the 36-bit value excluding the random value is shifted rightward by 6 bits. At this time, the value overflowed in the right direction is shifted to the upper bits.

  Next, a hash value (a random number given by the management server 1200 to give a variation in passwords from the 36-bit value after the shift. In this embodiment, the lower 4 of the 36 bits excluding the random value is used. Except for the bit, the lower 8th bit, the lower 16th bit, the lower 23th bit, the lower 28th bit, and the lower 33th bit)). Analyze story stages and production settings.

  Of these 30-bit values, the lower 3 bits indicate the anniversary, the lower 4 bits to the lower 11 bits indicate the level, the lower 12 bits to the lower 17 bits indicate the stage of the story, and higher than the lower 18 bits These bits are values indicating production settings 1 to 4, and 4 bits, 4 bits, 3 bits, and 3 bits are assigned to them respectively. Anniversary, level, story stage, and production settings specified from these values. Are set in the anniversary storage area, the level storage area, the story storage area, and the effect setting storage area, respectively.

  As described above, the personal history storage area is allocated to the RAM 91c, and the game history (total number of games, number of BBs, number of RBs) after the password is entered and authenticated as a regular password is accumulated. It has become so. Furthermore, when a mission (issue) set in advance in the slot machine has been achieved, a history of achievement missions indicating the types of missions achieved is also accumulated. In addition, as described above, every time 10 points are acquired, the level stored in the level storage area is increased. Also, the story progresses according to the number of games, and progresses to the next stage by reaching a certain number of games.

  When the player finishes the game, the player obtains a two-dimensional code that can specify the player's game history, current level, story stage, production setting, achievement mission history, and specifies from the two-dimensional code. Can be reflected in the contents of a player database, which will be described later, provided in the management server 1200.

  As shown in FIG. 11B, on the main menu screen after the password is entered or after the game is started by the simple start described later, as shown in FIG. 14A, “DATA CLEAR” “2D code creation” “Today "End" menu items are displayed, and as shown in FIG. 14 (a) on the main menu screen after the password is entered or after the game is started by the simple start described later, By selecting the menu item “Create Dimension Code”, a two-dimensional code is generated, and the generated two-dimensional code is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 as shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 17C, the output two-dimensional code is stored in the URL indicating the location of the update page on the management server, the password input at the start of the game, and the personal history storage area. The total number of games, the number of BBs, the number of RBs, the types of missions achieved, the level value stored in the level storage area, the stage of the story stored in the story storage area, and the effect setting storage area Production settings 1 to 4 and game random numbers (32-bit random numbers in the present embodiment), which are random values acquired every time a two-dimensional code is created, are stored.

  Then, the two-dimensional code is read by the portable terminal 1100 and accessed to the URL of the management server 1200 specified from the two-dimensional code, so that the content specified from the two-dimensional code is the content of the player database included in the management server 1200. To be reflected.

  Also, until the two-dimensional code is displayed after the password is authenticated, the input of a new password is prohibited. When the two-dimensional code is displayed and the display is cleared, The password stored in the password storage area, the total number of games stored in the personal history storage area, the number of BBs, the number of RBs, the type of mission accomplished, the level value stored in the level storage area, and stored in the story storage area The contents of the stage setting and the stage setting 1 to 4 stored in the stage setting storage area are all cleared, and the password input is permitted again.

  As described above, in the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, by inputting a password when starting a game, an effect that reflects past game history such as a level, a story, and an effect setting when the previous game was played is provided. It becomes possible to perform, and it is possible to perform a continuous effect over a long period of time. Also, since the password is included in the two-dimensional code that is output to specify a new game history, the password is issued by authenticating the password included in the two-dimensional code at the management server 1200 that issues the password. It is possible to determine whether the player has received the game, and even if a third party obtains another person's password and plays the game to obtain a two-dimensional code, or obtains another person's two-dimensional code. However, the game history specified from the two-dimensional code cannot be reflected in the player's own, and a new game history can be taken over by the player who has received the password, while the password is issued. It becomes impossible for a player other than the player to take over the game history. As a result, it is meaningless to divert or steal a password or a two-dimensional code. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the diversion or theft of a password and a two-dimensional code.

  In addition, since the password changes according to a random value that changes every time the password is issued by the management server 1200, even if a game history having the same content is specified, the password is not necessarily the same. It becomes difficult to guess.

  In the present embodiment, if the player has already been registered in the management server 1200, the player can start the game that can store the game history by only operating the effect switch 56 without entering the password. It becomes possible.

  Specifically, the personal history storage area (total number) assigned to the RAM 91c is determined by operating the game start operation, in the present embodiment, by operating the effect switch 56 for a certain period of time (hereinafter referred to as long press of the effect switch 56). The values of the number of games, the number of BBs, the number of RBs, and the achievement mission are initialized. When the effect switch 56 is pressed for a long time, after the effect switch 56 is pressed for a long time or a game start operation associated with the input of a password is performed, “2D code creation” is not selected. Even so, the value of the personal history storage area is initialized.

  In the personal history storage area, game histories (total number of games, number of BBs, number of RBs) from a game start operation associated with a long press of the effect switch 56 are accumulated. Furthermore, when a mission (issue) set in advance in the slot machine is achieved as in the case where a password is input, a history of achievement missions indicating the types of missions achieved is also accumulated. However, if a game start operation is performed in response to a long press of the production switch 56 without entering a password, unlike the case where a password is entered, points will not be given and the level will not rise, and the story The stage is not advanced, and the production setting cannot be changed from the default setting.

  Then, when the player finishes the game, if a game end operation is performed (“2D code creation” is selected on the main menu screen), a game start operation is performed in response to a long press of the effect switch 56. A two-dimensional code is generated from the game history from and displayed.

  Then, the player obtains the displayed two-dimensional code with a portable terminal and accesses the management server 1200 to thereby obtain a game history specified from the two-dimensional code by the portable terminal owned by the player. It can be reflected in the game history registered in the player database corresponding to the terminal identification information.

  The two-dimensional code displayed when the game is ended after the game is started by the start operation of the game accompanying the long press of the effect switch 56 is different from the case where the game is started by inputting the password. The URL indicating the location of the update page, the total number of games stored in the personal history storage area, the number of BBs, the number of RBs, and the type of mission accomplished are stored.

  Then, the two-dimensional code is read by the portable terminal 1100, and the URL of the management server 1200 specified by the two-dimensional code is accessed, so that the terminal identification information (SIM data) of the accessed portable terminal is already registered in the player database. When the terminal identification information (SIM data) of the accessed mobile terminal is already registered, the game history corresponding to the matching terminal identification information is updated. .

  As described above, in the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, if the player is already registered in the management server 1200, the password can be input without only entering the password by simply pressing the effect switch 56. The game can be performed in the same manner as in the case. At the end of the game, a two-dimensional code capable of specifying the game history from the start operation of the game accompanying the long press of the effect switch 56 to the end is displayed. Then, by accessing the management server 1200 with the two-dimensional code displayed at the end of the game, on the management server 1200 side, the terminal identification information of the mobile terminal that transmitted the game history is stored in the player database of the management server 1200. It is determined whether or not already registered, and if already registered, the game history corresponding to the corresponding terminal identification information is updated to the game history specified from the two-dimensional code. For this reason, it is possible for a player whose terminal identification information has already been registered in the player database to use the game history storage function without receiving a password, and then to terminate the game. By simply accessing the management server 1200 with the displayed two-dimensional code, it becomes possible to register / store the game history during that time in the management server 1200.

  In the present embodiment, the use of the function of accumulating the game history can be started by pressing and holding the effect switch 56 once, but “easy start” is a menu item on the main menu screen. Separately, it is possible to provide a use start item for a function for accumulating a game history, and to start using the function for accumulating a game history by designating the item, or by long pressing the effect switch 56 and the main menu screen. It is good also as a structure which can start utilization of the function which accumulate | stores game history by both item designation | designated.

  In this embodiment, in order to receive a password issued from the management server 1200, the management server 1200 is accessed in advance with a portable terminal or the like, and terminal identification information (SIM data) of the portable terminal is registered by member registration or the like. There is a need. In this embodiment, the URL indicating the location of the member registration page of the management server 1200 is specified by selecting “member registration” on the main menu screen before password input shown in FIG. A two-dimensional code is generated and displayed, and the member registration page of the management server 1200 can be easily accessed by reading the two-dimensional code with a portable terminal.

  Further, in the present embodiment, even a player who has not previously registered as a member by accessing the management server 1200 can start a game using a function for storing a game history.

  Specifically, by selecting “easy start” from the main menu screen shown in FIG. 11A, the sub CPU 91a obtains a starting random number from random numbers updated within a certain range, and is assigned to the RAM 91c. The obtained start random number is stored in the start random number storage area, and a two-dimensional code for the first start is generated and displayed. In this two-dimensional code, as shown in FIG. 17A, a URL indicating the location of the temporary registration page on the management server 1200 and a starting random number are stored, and this two-dimensional code is stored in the portable terminal. The terminal identification information (SIM data) assigned to the accessed mobile terminal 1100 and the starting random number specified from the two-dimensional code by accessing the URL of the management server 1200 that is read by 1100 and specified from the two-dimensional code Are temporarily registered in association with each other.

  On the other hand, in the slot machine 1, when “easy start” is selected, the values of the personal history storage areas (total number of games, number of BBs, number of RBs, achievement mission) assigned to the RAM 91c are initialized.

  In the personal history storage area, game histories (total number of games, number of BBs, number of RBs) since “easy start” is selected are accumulated. Furthermore, when a mission (issue) set in advance in the slot machine is achieved as in the case where a password is input, a history of achievement missions indicating the types of missions achieved is also accumulated. In addition, as described above, every time 10 points are acquired, the level stored in the level storage area is increased.

  When the player finishes the game, the player obtains a two-dimensional code that can specify the player's game history, current level, production setting, and achievement mission history, and specifies the content specified from the two-dimensional code. The management server 1200 can be reflected in the contents of a player database described later.

  The two-dimensional code displayed when the game is finished after selecting “Easy Start” and starting the game is different from the case where the game is started by entering a password, as shown in FIG. 17B. The URL indicating the location of the main registration page on the server, the starting random number stored in the starting random number storage area, the total number of games stored in the personal history storage area, the number of BBs, the number of RBs, and the achievement mission The type, the level value stored in the level storage area, the stage of the story stored in the story storage area, and the effect settings 1 to 4 stored in the effect setting storage area are stored.

  Whether or not the terminal identification information (SIM data) of the accessed mobile terminal is provisionally registered by reading the two-dimensional code with the mobile terminal 1100 and accessing the URL of the management server 1200 specified from the two-dimensional code. If the terminal identification information (SIM data) of the accessed mobile terminal is provisionally registered, the starting random number corresponding to the provisionally registered terminal identification information and the two-dimensional code are specified. It is determined whether or not the starting random number matches, and on the condition that it matches, the game history specified from the two-dimensional code, the current level, the stage of the story, the effect setting, and the achievement in association with the terminal identification information The history of missions is registered, and the player's data is now fully registered. Thereafter, the password is issued based on these data. Rukoto is possible.

  As described above, in the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, by inputting “easy start”, a starting random number is obtained, and only a two-dimensional code that can identify the starting random number is displayed. It is possible to play a game without entering the password as in the case of entering the password. Then, at the end of the game, a two-dimensional code that can specify the game history from the input of “easy start” to the end and the starting random number acquired when the “easy start” is input is displayed. Then, the player accesses and temporarily registers the management server 1200 with the two-dimensional code displayed at the start of the game, and accesses the management server 1200 with the two-dimensional code displayed at the end of the game. On the management server 1200 side, on the condition that the start random number specified from the two-dimensional code transmitted at the end of the game matches the start random number temporarily registered in the management server 1200, the two-dimensional code Thus, it is possible to newly register the game history specified from the above, that is, the game history of the player. For this reason, a player who uses the game history storage function for the first time does not need to access the management server 1200 in advance and register as a member before playing a game. The two-dimensional code displayed by inputting “easy start” By simply accessing the management server 1200, it becomes possible to start a game similar to the case where the password is input, and after that, only by accessing the management server 1200 with the two-dimensional code displayed by the end operation of the game, It is possible to register and store the game history during that time in the management server 1200.

  The sub CPU 91a according to the present embodiment switches to the basic screen after a predetermined period of time when no operation is performed after displaying the various menu screens shifted from the main menu screen as described above. Yes.

  The time until switching to the basic screen is determined for each screen. As shown in FIG. 15, the main menu screen and the password input OK screen are 1 minute, the end confirmation screen, the password input screen, the password input NG screen, 3 minutes are set for the 2D code creation confirmation screen, 2D code creation screen, today's result screen, data clear screen, and member registration screen, and 30 seconds are set for the data clear completion screen.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 15, an end confirmation screen, a password input screen, a password input NG screen, a two-dimensional code creation confirmation screen, and a two-dimensional code creation in which a relatively long 3 minutes are set as the time until switching to the basic screen. As for the screen, today's result screen, data clear screen, and member registration screen, some operations have been made 30 seconds before switching to the basic screen, that is, 2 minutes and 30 seconds have passed since the transition to one of these screens. If there is no selection operation during the period until the screen moves to the basic screen without any operation, the fact that the screen is switched to the basic screen is displayed on the screen, and this is notified. The advance notification is executed.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the main menu screen, that is, the screen in a state where a specific operation is not selected, the data clear screen, that is, the possibility that the game has been completed among the various menu screens shifted from the main menu screen. The high screen is switched to the basic screen in a relatively short time when no operation is performed.

  On the other hand, a password entry screen, that is, a screen that must be entered from the beginning if it is switched in the middle, or a two-dimensional code creation screen (screen on which the two-dimensional code is displayed), that is, a player side reads with a portable terminal This is a screen that requires a relatively complicated work for the player, such as input and reading, etc., and for those that are troublesome for the player if it switches immediately, until the screen switches to the basic screen when no operation is performed Is set longer than the above screen.

  For this reason, a screen that requires a relatively complicated work by the player will not switch to the basic screen in a short time, but is sufficient for the player to complete the necessary work as the time until switching to the basic screen. Time is secured. In particular, the password entry screen, that is, if the screen is switched immediately, the password entered halfway must be re-entered. In the case where no operation is performed on a screen that may be disadvantageous to the player, such as the game history is initialized if it is only displayed once and the 2D code cannot be acquired there, and it is not possible to acquire it again As the time required to switch to the basic screen is sufficient for the player to finish entering the password and obtaining the two-dimensional code, the player is forced to perform troublesome operations as described above. It is possible to avoid as much as possible a disadvantage to the person.

  On the other hand, the main menu screen, the data clear screen, etc. are switched to the basic screen when there is no operation even for a relatively short time, and only the main menu screen is displayed in the situation where no game is played. Even if the game is over or after the game is finished, even if you do not switch to the basic screen while clearing the data, the screen will switch to the basic screen in a relatively short time. Since it becomes possible to specify, it can prevent that the operation of a slot machine falls.

  In addition, on a screen with a relatively long 3 minutes as the time until switching to the basic screen, that is, a screen that requires a relatively complicated operation by the player, some operation is performed from a certain time before switching to the basic screen. If there is no selection operation during the period until the screen moves to another screen or no operation is performed, a prior notification is made to notify that the screen is switched to the basic screen. Even if the player does not perform a selection operation after a screen that requires relatively complicated work is displayed, the player can recognize that the screen will be switched to the basic screen in advance. It can prevent switching to the basic screen.

  Further, in the present embodiment, in the screen shown in FIG. 15, that is, various menu screens (excluding the end confirmation screen) shifted from the main menu screen, when the stop switch 8C is operated for a predetermined time or more, FIG. An end confirmation screen is displayed, and by selecting “YES” from “YES” and “NO”, the screen returns to the basic screen. That is, when various menu screens are displayed, it is possible to return to the basic screen by the player's operation without waiting for the passage of time. Further, in order to return from the menu screen to the basic screen, it is necessary to operate the stop switch 8C for a predetermined time or longer, that is, it is necessary to press and hold the switch for a long time. It is possible to prevent transition from the screen to the basic screen.

  The sub CPU 91a according to the present embodiment inputs the password when the user inputs a password, when “Easy start” is input, or when a game start operation associated with a long press of the effect switch 56 is performed. Control is made to a specific effect mode of an effect mode different from the effect mode (normal effect mode) when the game is played without the input of “start” and without the start operation of the game by the effect switch 56 being performed.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 18 (a), specific display areas 51a and 51b are assigned to a part of the display area of the liquid crystal display 51. In the normal display mode, the display area shown in FIG. As shown, only regular patterns are displayed in the specific effect areas 51a and 51b.

  On the other hand, when controlled to the specific effect mode, as shown in FIG. 18B, characters based on the effect setting set by the player are displayed in the specific effect area 51a. In 51b, a point meter indicating the level value (level value specified from the password) of the player and the point value required until the next level rise is displayed. The target displayed in the specific effect areas 51a and 51b in the specific effect mode is not limited to the above. For example, the achievement status of the mission may be displayed.

  When a game start operation is performed in accordance with the operation of the effect switch 56, the effect setting, the level value, and the like cannot be specified. Therefore, the specific effect area 51a is not the effect setting set by the player. Characters based on default production settings are displayed, and level values and point meters are not displayed in the specific production area.

  Further, regardless of whether the normal effect mode or the specific effect mode, as shown in FIG. 18C, the specific effect region is obtained by operating the stop switch 8C for a predetermined time or more while the basic screen is displayed. Although it is possible to delete 51a and 51b, in the default setting, the specific effect areas 51a and 51b are displayed, and a game start operation (input of a password or “easy start”, When the effect switch 56 is pressed for a long time or when a game end operation (data clear or two-dimensional code display) is performed, the specific effect areas 51a and 51b are erased until then. Effect areas 51a and 51b are displayed. Even when the stop switch 8C is operated for a predetermined time or more in a state where the basic screen is displayed and the specific effect areas 51a and 51b are deleted, the specific effect areas 51a and 51b are displayed again. It has become.

  In the specific effect mode and the normal effect mode, the display modes in the areas other than the specific effect areas 51a and 51b are the same, and the same effect is performed. For example, regardless of the effect mode, an effect that rains in the background as shown in FIG. 20B is performed, which suggests the result of the internal lottery as described later.

  On the other hand, in the specific effect mode, even if the display modes in the areas other than the specific effect areas 51a and 51b are the same, by changing the display contents of the specific effect areas 51a and 51b, the winning expectation degree of the special role is different there. It is also possible to

  In the present embodiment, the sub CPU 91a performs a normal effect lottery to determine whether or not to execute a simultaneous winning suggestion effect when watermelon and cherry are won (including simultaneous winning with a special role). As shown in FIGS. 20 (a) and 20 (b), the simultaneous winning suggestion effect includes an effect A in which the background other than the specific effect areas 51a and 51b is clear, and a specific effect area 51a. In the normal effect lottery, the effect A and the effect B are switched at the selection rate shown in FIG. 19 (a). Is selected. In the regular effect lottery, when either watermelon or cherry is won, there is a 100% probability that either effect A or effect B is not selected. Is not executed.

  As shown in FIG. 19B, in the normal effect lottery, the selection rate of the effect B at the time of simultaneous winning of the special role and the watermelon: B1 and the selection rate of the effect B at the time of the independent selection of the watermelon: B1 Production A with the probability that the ratio of A will be higher than the ratio of the former: A1 in the selection ratio of production A: A1 when A1 and watermelon are elected alone: , B are selected. In addition, the selection ratio of production B at the time of simultaneous winning of special role and cherry: the selection ratio of production B at the time of single winning of B3 and cherry: the ratio of former: B3 in B4 is the same at the time of simultaneous winning of special role and cherry Selection rate of production A: Production A and B are selected with a probability higher than the ratio of former: A3 in the selection rate of production A: A4 at the time of single selection of production A3 and cherry.

  For this reason, the execution of these simultaneous win suggestion effects suggests that watermelons or cherries that may win at the same time as special roles may have been won. A feeling can be heightened.

  In addition, when the watermelon or cherry and special role are simultaneously elected, the ratio of the effects A and B to which the effect B simultaneous winning suggestion effect is executed is higher, so the effect B is simultaneously elected than the effect A. If the suggestion effect is executed, the expectation can be enhanced more for the special role.

  In addition, when it is determined in the normal effect lottery that the simultaneous winning suggestion effect of either effect A or B is executed, the sub CPU 91a further controls the specific effect region 51a, if controlled to the specific effect mode. In 51b, a specific effect lottery is performed to determine whether or not to execute a special role winning suggestion effect that notifies the possibility of winning a special role.

  The special role winning suggestion is a meter that indicates the winning expectation degree of the special role in the specific effect area 51b, in addition to the simultaneous win suggestion effect in the areas other than the specific effect areas 51a and 51b. Is displayed, which suggests the possibility of winning the special role. As shown in FIGS. 20A and 20B, the character in the specific effect area 51a speaks as “Maybe!” And specified. As shown in FIGS. 21 (a) and 21 (b), the specific effect A in which a meter of the expected winning degree corresponding to the effect region 51b is displayed, and the character in the specific effect region 51a talks as “Large chance !!”. In the specific effect lottery, the specific effect B is displayed at the selection rate shown in FIG. 19C. Director B is selected. In the specific effect lottery, when the execution of the simultaneous winning suggestion effect is determined in the specific effect mode, either the specific effect A or the specific effect B is selected with a probability of 100%.

  As shown in FIG. 19 (d), in the specific effect lottery, the selection ratio of the specific effect B at the time of simultaneous winning of the special role and the watermelon: b1 and the former of the selection ratio of the specific effect B at the time of single winning of the watermelon: b2 : The ratio of b1 is higher than the ratio of the former: a1 in the selection ratio of the specific performance A: when the special combination and the watermelon are simultaneously selected: Thus, the specific effects A and B are selected. In addition, the selection ratio of the specific performance B in the simultaneous winning of the special role and cherry: b3 and the selection rate of the specific performance B in the single winning of the cherry: b4 ratio of the former: b3 is the simultaneous selection of the special performance and cherry Selection rate of specific production A at the time: Selection rate of specific production a at the time of single winning of a3 and cherry: The specific production A and B are selected with a probability higher than the ratio of the former: a3 in a4 It has become.

  For this reason, when the watermelon or cherry and the special role are won simultaneously, the ratio of the specific effect B suggesting effect of the specific effect B among the specific effects A and B is increased, so that the specific effect A is higher than the specific effect A. The direction in which the special role winning suggestion effect of the specific effect B is executed can enhance the expectation for the special role winning.

  In addition, when controlled to the specific effect mode, in addition to the simultaneous winning suggestion effect, the special winning combination suggesting effect is executed, so that the same simultaneous winning suggestion effect is executed in the areas other than the specific effect areas 51a and 51b. Even if it is done, the possibility of winning the special role will be more accurately notified by the difference in the special role winning suggestion effect in the specific effect areas 51a and 51b.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, in order to use the game history storage function, when a password is input or “easy start” is input, or when a start operation of the game accompanying a long press of the effect switch 56 is performed. In the specific effect mode controlled in the period until the game ending operation is performed, that is, the period in which the game history is collected, in addition to the simultaneous winning suggestion effect that is also executed in the normal effect mode, In this case, a special role winning suggestion that is not executed can be executed. Therefore, when the player inputs a password or inputs “Easy Start”, or when the player starts the game by pressing the effect switch 56 for a long time. That is, that is, the use of the function of accumulating a game history can be promoted.

  In particular, in the present embodiment, a special role winning suggestion effect is executed in the specific effect mode, and in the normal effect mode, a more detailed special in the simultaneous winning suggestion effect that only suggests one possibility. Since the possibility of winning a combination is suggested, it becomes possible for the player to know the possibility of winning a special combination more accurately. Therefore, it is possible to further promote the use of a function for accumulating a game history.

  Furthermore, as described above, there is an effect that is executed on condition that the level is a certain level or more, the number of accumulated games or the number of accumulated bonuses is a certain number or more, and such a mission is described above. A mission that is achieved by performing an effect that does not appear unless the level, cumulative number of games, or number of bonuses exceeds a certain level, that is, the level, level of cumulative games, number of bonuses, etc. are constant. Missions that can only be achieved by a certain number or more are defined, and these are premised on the use of a function for accumulating game histories, so that the use of the function for accumulating game histories can be further promoted.

  In addition, the specific effect areas 51a and 51b are assigned to the display area of the liquid crystal display 51, and in the specific effect mode, the display mode of the specific effect areas 51a and 51b is changed to an effect mode different from the normal effect mode. The production mode is controlled so that the production mode is different between the production mode and the normal production mode, and it is clear that the special role selection production that is different from the simultaneous production suggestion production is executed in the specific production mode. It is possible to prevent the suggested content from becoming difficult to understand due to overlapping of the suggestion effect and the special role selection suggestion effect.

  Moreover, since the display modes of the areas other than the specific effect areas 51a and 51b can be shared between the specific effect mode and the normal effect mode, it is possible to suppress the volume of image data and moving image data to be used.

  In the present embodiment, it is possible to delete the specific effect areas 51a and 51b by operating the stop switch 8C for a certain time or more while the basic screen is displayed. For a player who plays a game without shifting to the mode, it is possible to prevent the specific effect areas 51a and 51b, that is, the area where the effect is not performed in the normal effect mode, from getting in the way.

  By entering the password and shifting to the specific performance mode, the point meter indicating the level value specified from the password and the number of points required until the next level rise is displayed. The game history can be easily confirmed. Note that the game history displayed in the specific effect area is not limited to the level value and the number of points as described above, and the accumulated game number and accumulated bonus number, as well as the level value and accumulated game that are the execution conditions for the aforementioned effects. The number or the remaining value up to the cumulative bonus number may be displayed.

  In addition, it is possible to perform an effect using the specific effect areas 51a and 51b assigned to change the effect mode in the specific effect mode. For example, as shown in FIGS. 22 (a) to 22 (c), a wind effect is displayed in the background area, and the specific effect areas 51a and 51b themselves are moved accordingly, so that the specific effect area is changed in the background wind. 51a and 51b can be displayed as if they were skipped, and thereby the reaction of the character inside may be changed. By doing so, the specific effect areas 51a and 51b are effectively used as effects. can do.

  In addition, in this embodiment, it is a configuration that can be shifted to the specific effect mode other than the input of the password, but it may be configured to shift to the specific effect mode only when the password is input, and in this way, Even if the operation for shifting to the specific effect mode for collecting the game history is issued by the management server 1200 and a password is input, that is, a complicated operation is required, the game history is stored. It is possible to promote the use of the accumulated function.

  Next, the management server 1200, which is an example of the management apparatus of the present invention, will be described. The management server 1200 is configured by a general server computer having a CPU, a RAM, and the like, and is portable via the Internet network 900. Access is possible from the terminal 1100, and management of game history, issuance of passwords, provision of privileges, and the like are performed. The management server 1200 according to the present embodiment can be accessed only from a terminal to which terminal identification information (SIM data) is assigned, and a terminal to which terminal identification information is not assigned or terminal identification information is assigned. However, a terminal that refuses to transmit terminal identification information is denied access.

  The management server 1200 includes a player database that manages a player's game history, a game history database that manages a game history for each game, a privilege database that stores privilege data given to the player, and an unregistered player A temporary registration database for managing the temporary registration data.

  As shown in FIG. 23 (a), the player database corresponds to the terminal identification information (SIM data) that can identify the portable terminal owned by the player, the current status (standby, in game), password (Last issued), number of accesses (number of passwords issued), total number of games to date, total number of BBs, total number of RBs, current level, current story stage, production settings 1-4 The contents and the achievement status for each mission (1 for missions that have been completed, 0 for missions that have not been completed) are stored.

  As shown in FIG. 23 (b), the game history database corresponds to terminal identification information (SIM data) that can identify the mobile terminal owned by the player who played the game, and the game date and time. Sometimes game random numbers randomly acquired by the slot machine 1, the number of games in the game, the number of BBs in the game, the number of RBs in the game, the level value at the end of the game, the end of the game The stage of the time story, the setting contents of the production settings 1 to 4 at the end of the game, and the achievement status by mission in the game are stored.

  As shown in FIG. 23 (c), the privilege database corresponds to a privilege ID that can identify a privilege, the storage location of the privilege data, the type of privilege data, the type of condition for granting the privilege, the condition of the corresponding type A value is stored. As the type of condition, a level, a mission achievement rate, the number of games, the number of BBs, the number of RBs, and the like can be set, and a condition value according to the type can be set.

  As shown in FIG. 23D, the temporary registration database includes the terminal identification information (SIM data) of the mobile terminal that has transmitted the start registration request, the start random number specified from the start registration request, and the start registration. The registration date and time when the request is received is registered in association with each other.

  FIG. 24 is a view for explaining a password two-dimensional code database stored in a gaming machine such as the slot machine 1 in the present embodiment. Referring to FIG. 24, in the password two-dimensional code database, a password input to a gaming machine such as slot machine 1, a two-dimensional code that can specify a game history when the password is input, and The date and time when the dimension code is stored is associated and stored. The combination of data stored in the password two-dimensional code database is limited to 100 cases. As a result, the storage capacity of the gaming machine such as the slot machine 1 can be prevented from being consumed more than necessary.

  The game history includes the total number of games up to now, the total number of BBs, the total number of RBs, the current level, the stage of the current story, the setting contents of the production settings 1 to 4, as described in FIG. , Information such as the achievement status by mission (1 for missions that have been achieved, 0 for missions that have not been completed).

  Next, the operations of the management server 1200, the slot machine 1, and the portable terminal 1100 when the membership registration is performed by accessing the management server from the portable terminal 1100, FIG. 25, FIG. 27, FIG. 28, and FIG. Based on FIG. 25 is a first flowchart showing a flow of history management processing executed by the management server 1200 in the present embodiment. FIG. 27 is a first flowchart showing a flow of password-related processing executed in the slot machine 1 in the present embodiment. FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing a flow of main menu display processing executed in the slot machine 1 in the present embodiment. FIG. 31 is a diagram showing exchanges between the mobile terminal 1100 and the management server 1200 at the time of member registration.

  Referring to FIG. 27, in slot machine 1, in step S1201, sub CPU 91a of sub control unit 91 determines whether or not a main menu screen display operation has been performed. If it is determined that there is no main menu screen display operation (NO in step S1201), the sub CPU 91a advances the process to be executed to the process in step S1221. On the other hand, when the effect switch 56 is operated, it is determined that a main menu screen display operation has been performed (YES is determined in step S1201), and in step S1210, the sub CPU 91a executes a main menu display process.

  Referring to FIG. 28, in the main menu display process, first, in step S1211, the sub CPU 91a determines whether or not it is from the end of the game (after the setting change) until the multiplier is set. If it is determined that this is not the time (NO in step S1211), the sub CPU 91a returns the process to be executed to the caller process of this process.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the time is from the end of the game until the multiplier is set (YES in step S1211), the sub CPU 91a has entered the password in step S1212 or is simple. Determine if it is after the start.

  If it is determined that the password has already been entered and it is neither after the simple start (when NO is determined in step S1212), in step S1213, the sub CPU 91a displays the main menu before password input shown in FIG. The display control circuit 92 is controlled to display the screen on the liquid crystal display 51. Thereafter, the sub CPU 91a returns the process to be executed to the caller process of this process.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the password has been entered or that it is after the simple start (if YES is determined in step S1212), the main menu screen after the start of game history collection shown in FIG. 14A is displayed in step S1214. The display control circuit 92 is controlled to display on the liquid crystal display 51. Thereafter, the sub CPU 91a returns the process to be executed to the caller process of this process.

  Returning to FIG. 27, after step S1210, the sub CPU 91a advances the process to be executed to the process of step S1221. In step S1221, it is determined whether or not “member registration” is selected in the main menu before password input shown in FIG. If it is determined that it has not been selected (NO in step S1221), the sub CPU 91a advances the process to be executed to the process of step S1223.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that “member registration” is selected (YES in step S1221), in step S1222, the sub CPU 91a displays a two-dimensional code that can specify the URL of the member registration page of the management server 1200 as a liquid crystal. The display control circuit 92 is controlled to display on the display 51.

  The user operates the mobile terminal 1100 to start application software for reading a two-dimensional code, and captures the two-dimensional code with the camera unit 190 of the mobile terminal 1100. As a result of analyzing the read two-dimensional code by the application software, the URL of the member registration page is displayed on the display unit 140 of the portable terminal 1100. When the user selects the URL, the browser is activated on the mobile terminal 1100 and connected to the member registration page specified by the URL.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 31, the user inputs member information such as a name on the member registration page, and sends a member registration request including the input member information and terminal identification information of the mobile terminal 1100 to the management server 1200. To send.

  Referring to FIG. 25, in step S201, control unit 210 of management server 1200 determines whether or not a member registration request has been received from portable terminal 1100. If it is determined that it has not been received (NO in step S201), control unit 210 advances the process to be executed to step S211.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the member registration request has been received (YES in step S201), in step S202, the control unit 210 determines that the terminal identification information of the mobile terminal 1100 that has transmitted the member registration request is the player. Determine whether it is already registered in the database.

  When it is determined that the terminal identification information is already registered in the player database (when YES is determined in step S202), in step S203, the control unit 210 updates member information corresponding to the terminal identification information. Thereafter, in step S205, control unit 210 transmits the registration result to portable terminal 1100 indicated by the terminal identification information.

  Proceeding to FIG. 31, more specifically, when a member registration request is made from the mobile terminal 1100, the management server 1200 has the terminal identification information of the mobile terminal that has made the member registration request already registered in the player database. If there is matching terminal identification information, it is determined that only the terminal identification information has been registered by updating the registered member information or by simple start. The member information corresponding to the corresponding terminal identification information in the database is updated to the member information specified from the member registration request, and the registration result is notified to the mobile terminal 1100 that made the member registration request.

  Returning to FIG. 25, when it is determined that the terminal identification information is not already registered in the player database (when NO is determined in step S202), in step S204, the control unit 210 determines that the terminal identification information and the member The member information included in the registration request is registered in the player database. Thereafter, the control unit 210 performs the process of step S205 described above.

  Proceeding to FIG. 31, more specifically, if the terminal identification information of the mobile terminal that has made the membership registration request does not match the terminal identification information already registered in the player database, an unregistered game As the member registration request by the user, the terminal identification information of the portable terminal 1100 that has made the member registration request and the member information specified from the member registration request are newly registered in the player database, and the member registration request is made. The terminal 1100 is notified of the registration result.

  Upon receiving the registration result, the portable terminal 1100 displays the registration result and notifies the player to that effect.

  Next, the operations of the management server 1200, the slot machine 1, and the portable terminal 1100 when a player who plays a game for the first time inputs “easy start” and plays a game in the slot machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. This will be described with reference to FIGS. 29 and 32. FIG. FIG. 29 is a second flowchart showing the flow of the password related processing executed in the slot machine 1 in the present embodiment. FIG. 32 is a diagram showing exchanges between the slot machine 1, the portable terminal 1100, and the management server 1200 when playing a game without registering as a member in the first embodiment.

  Returning to FIG. 27, in step S1223, the sub CPU 91a determines whether or not “easy start” is selected in the main menu before password input shown in FIG. If it is determined that it has not been selected (NO in step S1223), the sub CPU 91a advances the process to be executed to step S1229.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that “member registration” has been selected (YES in step S1223), the sub CPU 91a obtains a starting random number and creates a two-dimensional code at the end of the game in step S1224. Therefore, the start random number is stored in the RAM 91c, a two-dimensional code is generated from the acquired start random number in step S1225, and the generated two-dimensional code is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 in step S1226. The display control circuit 92 is controlled.

  Next, the sub CPU 91a controls to shift to the specific effect mode in step S1227, and starts collecting game histories in step S1228. Thereafter, the sub CPU 91a advances the process to be executed to the process of step S1229.

  32, the flow will be described. When “Easy start” is selected in the slot machine 1, a starting random number is acquired, and a URL indicating the location of a temporary registration page and a starting random number can be specified. A two-dimensional code for initial start is generated and displayed.

  The player reads the two-dimensional code displayed on the mobile terminal 1100 and makes a start registration request including the start random number analyzed from the two-dimensional code and the terminal identification information of the mobile terminal 1100 to the management server 1200. Thus, the terminal identification information can be registered in the temporary registration database of the management server 1200.

  Returning to FIG. 25, in step S <b> 211, the control unit 210 of the management server 1200 determines whether a start registration request is received from the mobile terminal 1100. If it is determined that it has not been received (NO in step S211), control unit 210 advances the process to be performed to the process in step S221.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the start registration request has been received (YES in step S211), in step S212, the control unit 210 determines that the terminal identification information of the mobile terminal 1100 that is the transmission source of the start registration request is It is determined whether or not it is already registered in the player database.

  When it is determined that the terminal identification information is already registered in the player database (when YES is determined in step S212), in step S213, the control unit 210 indicates that the terminal identification information cannot be registered because it is already registered. It transmits to the portable terminal 1100 indicated by the information. Thereafter, the control unit 210 advances the process to be executed to the process of step S221.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the terminal identification information is not already registered in the player database (when NO is determined in step S212), in step S214, the control unit 210 includes the terminal identification information included in the start time registration request and the start time information. The random number and the registration date and time that is the date and time when the start registration request is received are associated with each other and temporarily registered in the storage unit 220.

  32, the flow will be described. When a start registration request is made from the mobile terminal 1100, the management server 1200 has already registered the terminal identification information of the mobile terminal that has made the start registration request in the player database. It is determined whether or not the terminal identification information matches, and if there is matching terminal identification information, the mobile terminal is notified that registration is impossible.

  On the other hand, if the terminal identification information of the mobile terminal that has made the registration request at the start does not match the terminal identification information already registered in the player database, the terminal identification information identified from the registration request at the start, The random number and the registration date and time (date and time when the registration request at the start is received) are associated with each other and registered in the temporary registration database, and notification to that effect is sent to the mobile terminal.

  In the slot machine 1, when “Easy start” is input and a two-dimensional code is displayed, the starting random number is stored in the starting random number storage area and the game history is initialized to change from the normal effect mode to the specific effect mode. Transition. Thereafter, the game is started by the player.

  Referring to FIG. 29, in step S1261, the sub CPU 91a of the sub control unit 91 of the slot machine 1 selects “Create two-dimensional code” on the main menu screen after starting the game history collection shown in FIG. It is determined whether a condition such as whether or not has been accepted is satisfied. If the CPU 91a determines that the condition that the selection of “two-dimensional code creation” is accepted is not satisfied (NO in step S1261), the CPU 91a advances the process to be executed to step S1281.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the condition such as “selection of two-dimensional code creation” is accepted (YES in step S1261), the CPU 91a stores the game random number (stored in the RAM 91c in step S1262). Alternatively, a random number at the start) is acquired, and a two-dimensional code is generated from the game history, password, game random number (or random number at the start), etc. in step S1263.

  Next, in step S1264, if the CPU 91a stores up to 100 data items in the storage area for storing the password two-dimensional code database described in FIG. Delete stored password, 2D code, and other data.

  In step S1265, the CPU 91a stores the image data of the two-dimensional code generated in step S1263 in association with the password in a predetermined area of the RAM 91c.

  In the present embodiment, the image data of the two-dimensional code is stored. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and any other data can be used as long as the information can specify the two-dimensional coded game history. For example, it may be game history data itself.

  Next, in step S1266 and step S1267, if the condition determined in step S1261 is that the selection of two-dimensional code creation is accepted, the CPU 91a displays the image of the two-dimensional code generated in step S1263 on the liquid crystal display. The display control circuit 92 is controlled so as to display on the screen 51.

  Then, the CPU 91a controls to shift to the normal performance mode in step S1268, and clears the collected game history in step S1269. Steps S1271 and S1272 will be described later. Thereafter, the CPU 91a advances the process to be executed to the process of step S1281.

  Also, in step S1261, the condition that the display has been switched to the demo screen because there has been no operation for a predetermined time during the game, the condition that a new password has been input, the condition that a power failure has occurred, and the game history are cleared and updated. It is also determined whether or not any of the conditions that the effect switch 56 is long-pressed to start a simple game is satisfied. Even when it is determined that any of these conditions is satisfied, the processing from step S1262 to step S1269 described above is executed.

  Further, in the case of the long press start of the effect switch 56, the CPU 91a controls to shift to the specific effect mode in Step S1271 and Step S1272.

  Referring to FIG. 32, the flow will be described. When the player finishes the game and selects “Create two-dimensional code” from the main menu screen, the starting random number and personal history stored in the starting random number storage area Total number of games stored in the storage area, number of BBs, number of RBs, types of missions completed, level value stored in the level storage area, story stage stored in the story storage area, production setting storage area A game history consisting of production settings 1 to 4 stored in is obtained, a two-dimensional code is generated from these data and a URL indicating the location of the main registration page, and a password is stored in a predetermined storage area. The personal history storage area, the level storage area, the story storage area, and the effect setting storage area are initialized and stored in association with each other and displayed on the liquid crystal display 51. To shift from the performance mode to the normal effect mode.

  On the other hand, if any of the conditions for transitioning to the demo, the condition for entering a new password, and the condition for power interruption occur, the display of the two-dimensional code is as described above. The flow is not done.

  The player reads the two-dimensional code displayed on the mobile terminal 1100, and sends an end-time registration request including the start random number, the game history, and the terminal identification information of the mobile terminal 1100 analyzed from the two-dimensional code to the management server 1200. Accordingly, the terminal identification information and the initial game history can be registered in the player database and game history database of the management server 1200.

  Returning to FIG. 25, in step S <b> 221, the control unit 210 of the management server 1200 determines whether an end-time registration request is received from the mobile terminal 1100. If it is determined that it has not been received (NO in step S221), control unit 210 advances the process to be executed to step S228.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the end registration request has been received (YES in step S221), in step S222, the control unit 210 determines that the terminal identification information of the mobile terminal 1100 that is the transmission source of the end registration request is It is determined whether or not it is temporarily registered in the player database.

  When it is determined that the terminal identification information is provisionally registered in the player database (when YES is determined in step S222), in step S223, the control unit 210 stores the starting random number stored in the storage unit 220, and Then, it is determined whether or not the start random numbers included in the end registration request match.

  When it is determined that the terminal identification information is not provisionally registered in the player database (when NO is determined at step S222), and when it is determined that the starting random numbers do not match (when NO is determined at step S223). In step S224, control unit 210 transmits information indicating that registration is impossible to portable terminal 1100 indicated by the terminal identification information. Thereafter, the control unit 210 advances the process to be executed to the process of step S228.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the starting random numbers match (when YES is determined in step S223), in step S225, the control unit 210 associates the terminal identification information, the game history, and the like and performs main registration in the storage unit 220. At the same time, the information temporarily registered in step S214 is deleted.

  In step S226, the control unit 210 transmits a message indicating that the main registration has been completed to the mobile terminal 1100 indicated by the terminal identification information. Next, in step S227, the control unit 210 executes history display processing. The history display process will be described later in the third embodiment. Thereafter, the control unit 210 advances the process to be executed to the process of step S228.

  In step S <b> 228, the control unit 210 determines whether there is temporary registration in the storage unit 220 after one day. If it is determined that there is (YES in step S228), in step S229, the control unit 210 deletes the temporary registration. Thereafter, and when it is determined that there is no provisional registration after one day has elapsed (when NO is determined in step S228), control unit 210 advances the process to be performed to the process of step S231.

  Referring to FIG. 32, the flow will be described. When a termination registration request is made from the portable terminal 1100, the management server 1200 registers the terminal identification information of the portable terminal 1100 that has made the termination registration request in the temporary registration database. It is determined whether or not the terminal identification information matches, and if there is no matching terminal identification information, the mobile terminal 1100 is notified that the registration is impossible.

  On the other hand, if the terminal identification information of the portable terminal 1100 that has made the registration request at the end matches the terminal identification information registered in the temporary registration database, it is registered in the temporary registration database corresponding to the matching terminal identification information. It is determined whether or not the start random number matches the start random number specified from the end registration request. If both start random numbers do not match, the mobile terminal 1100 indicates that registration is impossible. To notify.

  If both start random numbers match, the terminal identification information of the portable terminal 1100 that made the end registration request is newly registered in the player database, and registered at the end in association with the terminal identification information. The game history specified from the request is registered in the player database, and the game history specified from the end-time registration request is also registered in the game history database in association with the terminal identification information and the game date (current date data). Then, the mobile terminal 1100 that made the registration request at the end is notified of the completion of the main registration.

  In addition, when both the starting random numbers match, the terminal identification information of the portable terminal 1100 that made the end registration request is newly registered in the player database, and at the same time, the terminal identification information in the temporary registration database and the correspondence The starting random number and registration date and time are deleted.

  In addition, the terminal identification information registered in the temporary registration database, the corresponding starting random number, and the registration date and time will be maintained until the day after the registration date if the registration is not performed in response to the registration request at the end. Even if the main registration is not performed due to the registration request at the end, it is deleted.

  Next, operations of the management server 1200, the slot machine 1, and the portable terminal 1100 when issuing a password and playing a game in the slot machine 1 will be described based on FIG. 26, FIG. 27, and FIG. . FIG. 26 is a second flowchart showing the flow of history management processing executed by the management server 1200 in this embodiment. FIG. 33 is a diagram showing exchanges between the slot machine 1, the portable terminal 1100, and the management server 1200 when playing a game by inputting a password.

  Returning to FIG. 26, in step S <b> 231, control unit 210 determines whether or not a password issuance request has been received from portable terminal 1100. If it is determined that it has not been received (NO in step S231), control unit 210 advances the process to be executed to step S241.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the issue request has been received (YES in step S231), in step S232, the control unit 210 stores the terminal identification information of the mobile terminal 1100 that has transmitted the issue request in the player database. Determine if it is registered.

  When it is determined that the terminal identification information is not registered in the player database (when NO is determined in step S232), in step S233, the control unit 210 indicates that the password cannot be issued by the terminal identification information. To the portable terminal 1100. Thereafter, the control unit 210 advances the process to be executed to the process of step S241.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the terminal identification information is registered in the player database (when YES is determined in step S232), in step S234, the control unit 210 associates with the terminal identification information in the storage unit 220. A password is generated according to the procedure reverse to the procedure described in FIG. 16B on the basis of information such as the stored production settings, story, level, and anniversary, and the generated password is identified by the terminal. It transmits to the portable terminal 1100 indicated by the information.

  Further, it is determined whether or not the game history that affects password generation is the same as when the password was issued last time. If it is determined that the same is the same, the previous issued password is read out. Whether or not the game history affecting the generation of the password is the same as when the password was issued last time is determined by checking the password in the game history when updating the game history in step S225, step S246 or step S254. If there is a change in the game history of the part that affects the generation of the game, the change flag is turned on, and it is determined by determining whether or not the change flag is turned on when the password is issued in step S234. .

  In step S235, the control unit 210 updates and registers the generated password in the storage unit 220 in association with the terminal identification information as the previously issued password, and updates the status of the terminal identification information during the game. Thereafter, the control unit 210 advances the process to be executed to the process of step S241.

  Proceeding to FIG. 27, in step S <b> 1229, the sub CPU 91 a determines whether or not “password input” is selected in the main menu before password input shown in FIG. If it is determined that it has not been selected (NO in step S1229), the sub CPU 91a advances the process to be executed to the process of step S1231.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that “password input” has been selected (YES in step S1229), in step S1230, the sub CPU 91a determines whether or not FIG. 12 (b), FIG. 12 (c), FIG. 13 (a), Then, the display control circuit 92 is controlled to display the password input screen described in FIG. 13B on the liquid crystal display 51. Thereafter, the sub CPU 91a advances the process to be executed to the process of step S1231.

  In step S1231, the sub CPU 91a determines whether or not an input of a password has been accepted by performing an operation for determining the password on the password input screen. If it is determined that it has not been accepted (NO in step S1231), the sub CPU 91a advances the process to be executed to step S1251.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that password input has been accepted (YES in step S1231), in step S1232, the sub CPU 91a stores the input password and the password two-dimensional code database shown in FIG. The password is checked. In step S1233, it is determined whether there is a password that can be regarded as matching.

  Here, in this embodiment, when most of the passwords match, it is considered that the passwords match. Specifically, the passwords are considered to match if a predetermined identity determination condition for determining whether or not the passwords are identical is satisfied. For example, if the password is 8 digits, the password is considered to match if 6 or more digits match.

  If it is determined that there is no password that can be regarded as matching (NO in step S1233), the sub CPU 91a analyzes the password in accordance with the method described in FIG. 16 in step S1234, and in step S1235, the password is determined. Set the analyzed level and production settings.

  In step S1236, the sub CPU 91a stores the input password in the password two-dimensional code database shown in FIG. In step S1237, control is performed to shift to the specific effect mode, and in step S1238, collection of game history is started. Thereafter, the sub CPU 91a advances the process to be executed to the process of step S1251.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that there is a password that can be regarded as matching (YES in step S1233), in step S1241, the sub CPU 91a receives the same password as before as shown in FIG. The player is notified by controlling the display control circuit 92 to display the fact on the liquid crystal display 51.

  Next, in step S1242, the sub CPU 91a stores the password in the two-dimensional code database shown in FIG. 24 corresponding to the input password as shown in the screen of FIG. 14B shown in FIG. The display control circuit 92 is controlled to redisplay the two-dimensional code on the liquid crystal display 51.

  In step S1243, the sub CPU 91a moves the redisplayed two-dimensional code and the corresponding password to the storage area of the oldest stored data in the password two-dimensional code database shown in FIG. As a result, the two-dimensional code that has been redisplayed once is not preferably displayed again and again, and is therefore deleted preferentially. Thereafter, the sub CPU 91a advances the process to be executed to the process of step S1251.

  33, the flow will be described. When a new password issuance request is made from the portable terminal 1100, the management server 1200 registers the terminal identification information of the portable terminal 1100 that has issued the issuance request in the player database. It is determined whether or not the terminal identification information matches, and if there is no matching terminal identification information, the mobile terminal 1100 is notified that the issuance is impossible.

  On the other hand, if the terminal identification information of the mobile terminal that has issued the request matches the terminal identification information registered in the player database, the player sets the level, story stage, and effect setting corresponding to the terminal identification information. Get password from database and issue password.

  The password is generated by a procedure reverse to the procedure shown in FIG. First, the level of the corresponding terminal identification information, the stage of the story, and the effect setting are acquired, and a 30-bit value is created based on the acquired data. At this time, when it is the player's birthday or when it is an anniversary such as one month from registration, anniversary data is also set to create a 30-bit value. Next, a 6-bit random value is acquired, and the acquired value is used as a hash value between the lower 3 bits and 4 bits, between the lower 6 bits and the lower 7 bits, between the lower 13 bits and the lower 14 bits, and lower One bit is inserted between 19 bits and the lower 20 bits, between the lower 23 bits and the lower 24 bits, and between the lower 27 bits and the lower 28 bits, thereby creating a 36-bit value. Next, a 4-bit random value (0 to 15) is acquired, and the acquired value (maximum 15) is shifted to the left by the number of bits. At this time, the value overflowed in the left direction is shifted to the lower bits.

  Next, the value used for the bit shift, that is, the 4-bit random value is divided into the upper 2 bits and the lower 2 bits, and added to the upper 2 bits and the lower 2 bits of 36 bits as the random values described above, respectively, Value. Next, the created 40-bit value is divided every 5 bits, replaced with decimal numbers, and the replaced value is replaced with characters based on the password analysis table shown in FIG. To do.

  Next, it is determined whether or not it matches the password registered in the corresponding terminal identification information in the player database, that is, the previously issued password, and if it matches, it matches the previous password in the procedure described above. The password is generated again until it is determined not to do so.

  If the portion of the game history that affects password generation is not changed from the previous game history, the same password is read and issued.

  The management server 1200 issues a password as described above, transmits the password to the mobile terminal 1100 that issued the request, and sets the password corresponding to the terminal identification information of the mobile terminal 1100 that issued the issue request in the player database. Update to the issued password, and update the status of the corresponding terminal identification information during the game. When a password issuance request is accepted, password issuance is not prohibited even if the status of the corresponding terminal identification information is in game, and a new password issuance request is accepted in such a situation. Even if a password is issued, a new password is issued and the previous password becomes invalid.

  When the password is issued in response to the password issuance request, the issued password is displayed on the portable terminal 1100, and the player inputs the displayed password into the slot machine 1. Then, in the slot machine 1 in which the password is input, the input password is analyzed as described above, and when the password is authenticated, the level specified from the password, the stage of the story, and the production setting are set on the slot machine 1 side. By doing so, it becomes possible to play a game by taking over the level, story stage, and production settings managed by the management server 1200. At this time, the password is stored in the password storage area, and the normal effect mode is shifted to the specific effect mode. Thereafter, the game is started by the player.

  In addition, it is possible to set anniversary data for the password as described above. If a specific anniversary is set as the anniversary data, the password is specific to the anniversary in the specific performance mode. Can be performed.

  Returning to FIG. 29, at the end of the game, when the selection of “Create two-dimensional code” is accepted on the main menu screen after the start of the game history collection shown in FIG. 14A, the above-described steps S1261 to S1269 are performed. The process up to is executed.

  Referring to FIG. 33, the flow will be described. When the player finishes the game and selects “Create 2-D code” from the main menu screen, the password stored in the password storage area and stored in the personal history storage area The total number of games played, the number of BBs, the number of RBs, the types of missions completed, the level value stored in the level storage area, the stage of the story stored in the story storage area, and the effect setting storage area A game random number is acquired from a game history consisting of the production settings 1 to 4 and a random number updated within a certain range, and a two-dimensional code is generated from these data and a URL indicating the location of the update page, The password is stored in a predetermined storage area in association with the password, displayed on the liquid crystal display 51, and the personal history storage area is initialized. To shift to the normal performance mode.

  On the other hand, if any of the conditions for transitioning to the demo, the condition for entering a new password, and the condition for power interruption occur, the display of the two-dimensional code is as described above. The flow is not done.

  The player reads the two-dimensional code displayed on the mobile terminal 1100 and sends an update request including the game history, password, game random number, and terminal identification information of the mobile terminal 1100 analyzed from the two-dimensional code to the management server 1200. As a result, the game history acquired by the two-dimensional code can be reflected in the player database of the management server 1200.

  Returning to FIG. 26, in step S <b> 241, the control unit 210 of the management server 1200 determines whether an update request has been received from the mobile terminal 1100. If it is determined that no data has been received (NO in step S241), control unit 210 advances the process to be executed to step S251.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the update request has been received (YES in step S241), in step S242, the control unit 210 stores the terminal identification information of the mobile terminal 1100 that is the source of the update request in the player database. Determine if it is registered.

  When it is determined that the terminal identification information is not registered in the player database (when NO is determined in step S242), in step S249, the control unit 210 indicates that the game history cannot be updated using the terminal identification information. To the mobile terminal 1100 shown. Thereafter, the control unit 210 advances the process to be executed to the process of step S251.

  When it is determined that the terminal identification information is registered in the player database (when YES is determined in step S242), in step S243, the control unit 210 is stored in the storage unit 220 in association with the terminal identification information. It is determined whether the existing password and the password included in the update request match. In step S244, control unit 210 determines whether the password is different by only one character before and after.

  When it is determined that the passwords do not match and that only one character is not the same before and after one character (when NO is determined in step S243 and step S244), the control unit 210 performs the process to be executed in step S249 described above. Proceed to

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the passwords match or that only one character is different by one character before and after (when YES is determined in step S243 or step S244), in step S245, the control unit 210 is identified from the update request. It is determined whether or not the same password and game random number are stored in the game history database for the terminal identification information specified from the update request. If it is determined that it is stored (YES in step S245), control unit 210 advances the process to be executed to the process in step S249 described above.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the same password and game random number are not stored (when NO is determined in step S245), in step S246, the control unit 210 is stored in association with the terminal identification information in the player database. The game history is updated and registered, and the status of the terminal identification information is updated during standby.

  In step S247, control unit 210 transmits to mobile terminal 1100 indicated by the terminal identification information that the game history has been updated. Next, in step S248, the control unit 210 executes history display processing. The history display process will be described later in the third embodiment. Thereafter, the control unit 210 advances the process to be executed to the process of step S251.

  33, the flow will be described. When an update request is made from the mobile terminal 1100, the management server 1200 is a terminal in which the terminal identification information of the mobile terminal 1100 that made the update request is registered in the player database. It is determined whether or not it matches the identification information. If there is no matching terminal identification information, the mobile terminal 1100 is notified that the update is impossible.

  On the other hand, if the terminal identification information of the mobile terminal 1100 that has made the update request matches the terminal identification information registered in the player database, the terminal identified from the update request is the password identified from the update request. The password is checked against the password registered in the player database in association with the identification information. If the password specified from the update request matches the password registered in the player database, the player is authenticated as the player who issued the password, and the password specified from the update request and The game random number is compared with the password and the game random number registered in association with the terminal identification information specified from the update request in the game history database, and it is determined whether or not they match. Based on the game history specified from the update request, the corresponding item of the corresponding terminal identification information in the player database is updated and specified from the update request in association with the terminal identification information and the game date and time (current date and time data). Registered game history and game random numbers in the game history database, and the status of the corresponding terminal identification information is updated during standby. And notifies the update completion to the portable terminal 1100 which made the update request. On the other hand, if the password and game random number specified from the update request match the password and game random number registered in the game history database in association with the terminal identification information specified from the update request, Since there is a very high possibility that the update request is the same two-dimensional code used for the update request, the mobile terminal 1100 is notified that the update is impossible.

  Further, as a result of checking the password specified from the update request with the password registered in the player database in association with the terminal identification information specified from the update request, when both passwords do not match, It is determined whether only one of the characters is a difference of one character before and after the password when the password is input. The character difference before and after the arrangement in the password input is one character before and after the password input screen shown in FIG. 12B. For example, if the regular password is “Z”, the character before and after the character is “ “Y” and “=” correspond.

  And if only one of the characters is a difference other than the difference of one character before and after, that is, if two or more characters are different or the difference is one character, but not one character before and after, update The mobile terminal 1100 is notified that it is impossible. On the other hand, if only one of the characters is different by one character before and after, the player who has issued the password is temporarily authenticated as satisfying the input error condition, and the password specified from the update request and The game random number is compared with the password and the game random number registered in association with the terminal identification information specified from the update request in the game history database, and it is determined whether or not they match. Based on the game history specified from the update request, the corresponding item of the corresponding terminal identification information in the player database is updated and specified from the update request in association with the terminal identification information and the game date and time (current date and time data). Game history and game random numbers are registered in the game history database, the status of the corresponding terminal identification information is updated during standby, and an update request is made. It was notifying the update completion to the mobile terminal 1100.

  At this time, instead of updating all the corresponding items of the corresponding terminal identification information in the player database based on the game history specified from the update request, the total number of games, the number of BBs, the number of RBs, the player Update only items that do not affect the continuity of the game history, such as the types of missions that can appear at the level value of the corresponding terminal identification information registered in the database, and the level, story stage, production setting, and applicable terminal Items that affect the continuity of the game history, such as the types of missions that do not appear with the level value of the identification information, are not updated. In addition, in the notification of update completion, it is also notified that the passwords did not match completely but were in the range of input errors, so that only some items that did not affect continuity were updated. It is supposed to be.

  Also, if the password and game random number specified from the update request match the password and game random number registered in the game history database in association with the terminal identification information specified from the update request, the previous Since there is a very high possibility that the update request is the same two-dimensional code used for the update request, the mobile terminal 1100 is notified that the update is impossible.

  In addition, if you forget to obtain a two-dimensional code at the end of the game, even if the status remains in game, issuance of a new password is permitted without making an update request as described above. It is like that.

  Next, the operations of the management server 1200, the slot machine 1, and the portable terminal 1100 when playing a game in the slot machine 1 without issuing a password are described based on FIG. 26, FIG. 29, and FIG. explain. FIG. 34 is a diagram showing exchanges between the slot machine 1, the portable terminal 1100, and the management server 1200 when playing a game without entering a password.

  Returning to FIG. 29, when the player presses the effect switch 56 for a long time, the processing from step S1261 to step S1272 described above is executed.

  Referring to FIG. 34, the flow will be described. When a game start operation is performed in response to a long press of the effect switch 56 in the slot machine 1, the game history is initialized and the normal effect mode is shifted to the specific effect mode. Even in the specific effect mode, when a game start operation is performed in response to a long press of the effect switch 56, the game history is initialized.

  Returning to FIG. 29, at the end of the game, when the selection of “Create two-dimensional code” is accepted on the main menu screen after the start of the game history collection shown in FIG. 14A, the above-described steps S1261 to S1269 are performed. The process up to is executed.

  Referring to FIG. 34, the flow will be described. When the player finishes the game and selects “2D code creation” from the main menu screen, the total number of games and the number of BBs stored in the personal history storage area. A game random number is acquired from a game history consisting of the number of RBs, the type of mission accomplished, and a random number updated within a certain range, and a two-dimensional code is generated from these data and a URL indicating the location of the update page Then, the password is stored in a predetermined storage area in association with the password, displayed on the liquid crystal display 51, and the personal history storage area is initialized, and the specific effect mode is shifted to the normal effect mode.

  The player reads the two-dimensional code displayed on the portable terminal 1100 and makes a simple update request including the game history analyzed from the two-dimensional code and the terminal identification information of the portable terminal 1100 to the management server 1200. If the player is already registered in the player database of the management server 1200, the game history from that point to the end of the game can be reflected in the player database simply by pressing and holding the effect switch 56. It is like that.

  Returning to FIG. 26, in step S <b> 251, the control unit 210 of the management server 1200 determines whether a simple update request has been received from the mobile terminal 1100. If it is determined that the data has not been received (NO in step S251), control unit 210 advances the process to be executed to step S261.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that a simple update request has been received (YES in step S251), in step S252, control unit 210 determines that the terminal identification information of portable terminal 1100 that is the source of the simple update request is the player. Determine whether it is registered in the database.

  When it is determined that the terminal identification information is not registered in the player database (when NO is determined in step S252), in step S259, the control unit 210 indicates that the game history cannot be updated using the terminal identification information. To the mobile terminal 1100 shown. Thereafter, the control unit 210 advances the process to be executed to the process of step S261.

  When it is determined that the terminal identification information is registered in the player database (when YES is determined in step S252), in step S253, the control unit 210 has the same password and game random number specified from the update request. Then, it is determined whether or not the terminal identification information specified from the update request is stored in the game history database. If it is determined that it is stored (YES in step S253), control unit 210 advances the process to be performed to the process in step S259 described above.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the same password and game random number are not stored (when NO is determined in step S253), in step S254, the control unit 210 is stored in association with the terminal identification information in the player database. The game history is updated and registered, and the status of the terminal identification information is updated during standby.

  In step S255, the control unit 210 transmits a message indicating that the game history has been updated to the mobile terminal 1100 indicated by the terminal identification information. Next, in step 256, it is determined whether or not a simple update request has been transmitted for the terminal identification information five times or more in total.

  When it is determined that the message has been transmitted five times or more (when YES is determined in step S256), in step S257, the control unit 210 receives a password and recommends playing a game. Is transmitted to the portable terminal 1100 indicated by the terminal identification information. Thereafter, and when it is determined that the simple update request has not been transmitted five times or more (when NO is determined in step S256), control unit 210 advances the process to be performed to the process of step S258.

  In step S258, the control unit 210 executes history display processing. The history display process will be described later in the third embodiment. Thereafter, the control unit 210 advances the process to be executed to the process of step S261.

  34, the flow will be described. When a simple update request is made from the portable terminal 1100, the management server 1200 registers the terminal identification information of the portable terminal 1100 that has made the simple update request in the player database. If there is no matching terminal identification information, the mobile terminal 1100 is notified that the update is not possible.

  On the other hand, when the terminal identification information of the portable terminal 1100 that has made the simple update request matches the terminal identification information registered in the player database, the game history and game random number specified from the simple update request, and the game The game history and game random numbers registered in association with the terminal identification information specified from the simple update request in the history database are checked to determine whether or not they match. The corresponding item of the corresponding terminal identification information in the player database is updated on the basis of the game history specified from the above, and is specified from the simple update request in association with the terminal identification information and the game date and time (current date and time data). Game history and game random numbers are registered in the game history database, the status of the corresponding terminal identification information is updated during standby, and a simple update request is made. It was notifying the update completion to the mobile terminal 1100.

  Note that the game history specified from the simple update request is only the total number of games, the number of BBs, the number of RBs, and the types of missions achieved, and other items are not updated in the simple update request.

  On the other hand, when the game history and game random number specified from the simple update request match the game history and game random number registered in the game history database in association with the terminal identification information specified from the simple update request. Is highly likely to be a simple update request using the same two-dimensional code used for the previous simple update request, and notifies the portable terminal 1100 that the update is impossible.

  In addition, for the terminal identification information that has already been registered, the number of times that a simple update request has been made, that is, the number of times that a game has been played without receiving a password, is counted. If it is five times or more, the portable terminal 1100 is notified of a password recommendation guide for recommending that a game is issued upon receipt of a password.

  In the recommended password guidance, by playing a game after receiving a password, you can take over the level, story stage, production settings, etc. Therefore, the content prompting the user to receive a password is provided.

  Next, operations of the management server 1200 and the portable terminal 1100 when granting a privilege will be described based on FIG. 26 and FIG. FIG. 35 is a diagram showing exchanges between the mobile terminal 1100 and the management server 1200 when a privilege is obtained.

  Returning to FIG. 26, in step S <b> 261, control unit 210 determines whether or not a privilege request for requesting provision of a privilege has been received from portable terminal 1100. If it is determined that a privilege request has not been received (NO in step S261), control unit 210 returns the process to be executed to the caller process of this process.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the privilege request has been received (when YES is determined in step S261), in step S262, the control unit 210 indicates that the terminal identification information of the portable terminal 1100 that has transmitted the privilege request is stored in the player database. Determine if it is registered.

  When it is determined that the terminal identification information is not registered in the player database (when NO is determined in step S262), the control unit 210 returns the process to be executed to the caller process of this process.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the terminal identification information is registered in the player database (when YES is determined in step S262), the control unit 210 extracts a privilege that can be given to the terminal identification information in step S263. In step S264, a list of the extracted benefits is created, and the created privilege list is transmitted to the mobile terminal 1100 indicated by the terminal identification information.

  In step S265, it is determined whether or not a privilege type is received from portable terminal 1100 that has transmitted the privilege list. If it is determined that it has not been received (NO in step S265), control unit 210 repeats the process in step S265.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the privilege type has been received (YES in step S265), in step S266, control unit 210 reads the privilege data indicated by the received privilege type and transmits the privilege type. To the portable terminal 1100. Thereafter, the control unit 210 returns the process to be executed to the process of the caller of this process.

  The flow will be described with reference to FIG. 35. When a privilege is obtained with the mobile terminal 1100, the privilege grant page of the management server 1200 is first accessed from the mobile terminal 1100. Then, a privilege request including the terminal identification information of the mobile terminal 1100 is transmitted to the management server 1200 on the privilege grant page.

  When a privilege request is made from the mobile terminal, the management server 1200 determines whether or not the terminal identification information of the mobile terminal that has made the privilege request matches the terminal identification information registered in the player database. If there is no terminal identification information to be notified, the mobile terminal is notified that the request is not possible.

  On the other hand, if the terminal identification information of the mobile terminal that has made the privilege request matches the terminal identification information registered in the player database, the player database is informed based on the terminal identification information specified from the privilege request. Get the player's game history.

  Next, the privilege data satisfying the grant condition is extracted based on the condition type and the condition value of the privilege database and the game history acquired from the player database, and the privilege list is created and the portable terminal 1100 that has made the privilege request is extracted. Deliver to

  When a desired privilege is selected from the privilege list on the mobile terminal 1100 that has acquired the privilege list, data indicating the selected privilege type is transmitted to the management server 1200. In response, the management server 1200 corresponds to the privilege type. The privilege data extracted from the storage location of the privilege data to be distributed is distributed to the mobile terminal 1100 that has made the privilege request, and the player who has made the privilege request based on this acquires the privilege data.

  Returning to FIG. 7, the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment includes the away sensor 57 that detects that the player has left. The away sensor 57 is connected to the effect control board 90. The detection signal of the away sensor 57 is input to the effect control board 90.

  Proceeding to FIG. 29, in step S1251, the sub CPU 91a of the effect control board 90 of the slot machine 1 determines whether or not the detection signal indicating that the player has left the seat has been received from the seat sensor 57. , It is determined whether or not the player has left without displaying the two-dimensional code.

  When it is determined that the player has left the seat (when YES is determined in step S1251), in step S1252, the sub CPU 91a displays to the player that the user has forgotten to take the two-dimensional code indicating the game history. Inform. Moreover, you may make it alert | report by sound, light, or a vibration instead of a display or with a display.

  In step S1281, the sub CPU 91a of the slot machine 1 determines whether or not it is a time when the power is cut off. If it is determined that the power supply has not been recovered (NO in step S1281), the sub CPU 91a returns the process to be executed to the calling process of this process.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the power has been recovered from the power interruption (YES in step S1281), the sub CPU 91a determines the level corresponding to the game history indicated by the two-dimensional code stored in step S1265 in step S1282. Then, the story and the effect setting are reflected, and control is made to shift to the specific effect mode in step S1283.

  Next, in step S1284, the sub CPU 91a controls the display control circuit 92 to display the premier character reflecting the game history on the liquid crystal display 51, and obtains a two-dimensional code for acquiring the character. The display control circuit 92 is controlled to display on the liquid crystal display 51. Next, in step S1285, the sub CPU 91a additionally registers a mission indicating that a power interruption has occurred as an accomplished mission.

  In this way, in the event of an accident such as a power interruption, even if an unexpected situation occurs by increasing the parameters of the game history or adding premium data, A decrease can be prevented.

  In step S 1286, the sub CPU 91 a notifies the player by displaying that the two-dimensional code indicating the game history has been forgotten. Moreover, you may make it alert | report by sound, light, or a vibration instead of a display or with a display.

  FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing the flow of level-related processing executed in the slot machine 1 in the present embodiment. Referring to FIG. 30, in step S1291, the sub CPU 91a of the effect control board 90 of the slot machine 1 determines whether or not a notice effect that strikes the effect switch 56 is being executed.

  If it is determined that it is being executed (YES in step S1291), in step S1292, the sub CPU 91a counts the cumulative number of operations of the effect switch 56.

  After step S1292 and when it is determined that it is not being executed (when NO is determined at step S1291), at step S1293, the sub CPU 91a determines whether or not the achievement condition shown in FIG. 10 is satisfied. When it is determined that it is not established (when NO is determined in step S1293), in step S1294, the sub CPU 91a determines whether or not it is at the time of power-off recovery. If it is determined that it is not at the time of power-off recovery (NO in step S1294), the sub CPU 91a advances the process to be executed to the process in step S1298.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the achievement condition is satisfied (YES in step S1293), in step S1295, the sub CPU 91a has the cumulative number of operations of the effect switch 56 counted in step S1292 equal to or greater than a predetermined number. Determine whether or not.

  When it is determined that the cumulative number of operations is not equal to or greater than the predetermined number (when NO is determined at step S1295), or when it is determined that the power is restored (when YES is determined at step S1294), at step S1296 The sub CPU 91a gives the player points according to the achievement conditions. Thereafter, the sub CPU 91a advances the process to be executed to the process of step S1298.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the cumulative number of operations is equal to or greater than the predetermined number (when YES is determined in step S1295), in step S1297, the sub CPU 91a gives the player twice the point according to the achievement condition. Thereafter, the sub CPU 91a advances the process to be executed to the process of step S1298.

  In this way, in addition to when the achievement condition is satisfied, points are also awarded to the player when power is restored. For this reason, when an accident such as a power failure occurs, by increasing the parameter of the game history, even if an unexpected situation occurs, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game.

  Also, in the notice effect that repeatedly strikes the effect switch 56, when the cumulative number of operations is greater than or equal to the predetermined number, the game history parameters such as points when the achievement condition is satisfied, compared to the case where the cumulative number of operations is less than the predetermined number It is easy to be reflected in. For this reason, the player can more actively operate the operation means such as the effect switch 56, and the participation in the game can be improved.

  In step S1298, the sub CPU 91a determines whether or not the player has acquired 10 points. If it is determined that 10 points have been acquired (YES in step S1298), in step S1299, the sub CPU 91a adds 1 to the level and resets the points. After step S1299 and when it is determined that 10 points have not been acquired (NO in step S1298), the sub CPU 91a returns the process to be executed to the caller process of this process.

  As described above, in the gaming system 1001 of the present embodiment, a password for specifying a past gaming history is obtained by making a password issuance request at the portable terminal 1100, and a game is played at the slot machine 1. When starting the game, it is possible to execute an effect that reflects the past game history, that is, the level, story stage, and effect settings made at other slot machines, etc. at the end of the game To update the game history of the player managed by the management server 1200 to a new game history by acquiring a two-dimensional code in the portable terminal 1100 and making an update request, and to specify the next new game history Since it becomes possible to acquire the password, it is possible to provide a continuous performance over a long period of time.

  In particular, in the present embodiment, the slot machine 1 is configured to analyze a password input by a player and specify a past game history, so that each gaming machine such as the slot machine 1 is replaced with another gaming machine. Further, without connecting to the management server 1200, it is possible to perform effects reflecting past game histories that have been played on other gaming machines.

  In addition, the password issued by the management server 1200 is registered in association with the terminal identification information for which the password issuance request is made, and is further outputted to end the game in the slot machine 1 and specify a new game history. The two-dimensional code also includes the password entered at the start of the game, the update request includes the password specified from the two-dimensional code, and the password registered in the management server 1200 and the password included in the update request By verifying, it is authenticated that the player is the player who issued the password, and the player's game history is updated to a new game history on the condition that the player has been authenticated. Even if three parties obtain another person's password and play a game to obtain a two-dimensional code, or obtain another person's two-dimensional code, the two-dimensional The game history specified from the game cannot be reflected in its own game history, and it is possible to take over a new game history by a player who has been issued a password, while the game that has received a password issuance It becomes impossible for a player other than the player to take over the game history. As a result, it is meaningless to divert or steal a password or a two-dimensional code. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the diversion or theft of a password and a two-dimensional code.

  In addition, since the management server 1200 generates a random value every time a password issuance request is issued from the portable terminal 1100 and is issued, the same password is used when a game history having the same content is specified. However, since it is difficult to tamper with the password, it is possible to more reliably prevent the diversion or theft of the password and the two-dimensional code.

  In addition, when the management server 1200 receives an update request from the mobile terminal 1100, the management server 1200 collates the password registered in the management server 1200 with the password included in the update request. The player who has performed is authenticated as the player who has issued the password, and the corresponding item of the corresponding terminal identification information in the player database is updated based on the game history specified from the update request.

  On the other hand, in the slot machine 1, even if there is an input mistake when entering the password, if the data analyzed from the password is normal, the password is authenticated and the mode is shifted to the specific performance mode. Since the password stored in the two-dimensional code is also a password due to an input error, when the two-dimensional code is read and an update request is made to the management server 1200, the password registered in the management server 1200 The passwords included in the update request will not match, and the game history may not be updated.

  For this reason, in the management server 1200 according to the present embodiment, even when the password registered in the management server 1200 and the password included in the update request do not match, only one of the characters is different by one character before and after. The player is temporarily authenticated as a player who has been issued a password, assuming that a specific condition presumed to be an input error is satisfied, and the corresponding terminal identification information in the player database is based on the game history specified from the update request. The corresponding item is updated, and even if the player enters the password incorrectly, the game history is updated if the error is within the range that satisfies a specific condition that is presumed to be an input error. It is possible to prevent the game history of playing games during that time from being wasted.

  In addition, if the player who made the update request with the password registered in the management server 1200 matching the password included in the update request is authenticated as the player who has issued the password, the identification is made from the update request. While all the corresponding items of the corresponding terminal identification information in the player database are updated based on the played game history, the password registered in the management server 1200 does not match the password included in the update request When one of the characters is a difference of one character before and after, and the player who made the update request is authenticated as the player who has issued the password, assuming that a specific condition that is assumed to be an input error is satisfied Among the corresponding items of the corresponding terminal identification information in the player database, the total number of games, the number of BBs, the number of RBs, Only items that do not affect the continuity of the game history, such as the types of achievement missions that can appear at the level value of the corresponding terminal identification information recorded, are updated, the level, the stage of the story, the production settings, and the corresponding terminal identification information Items that affect the continuity of the game history, such as the types of achievement missions that do not appear with the level value of, are not updated, for example, the level value falls below the original level value, the story As a result of playing a game with an incorrect password, such as skipping the stage or causing a contradiction in the effect setting or the type of mission accomplished, it is possible to prevent a game history that has trouble with continuity from being updated.

  In addition, the password registered in the management server 1200 and the password included in the update request do not match, and any one character is a difference of one character before and after, and a specific condition that is assumed to be an input error is satisfied. When the player who made the update request is authenticated as the player who has issued the password, the password does not completely match in the update completion notification to the mobile terminal 1100 that made the update request. However, since it was informed that it was in the range of input mistakes, and therefore, only some items that did not affect continuity were updated, the player missed the password entry, but the game history It is possible to recognize that the game has been updated successfully, and to identify the cause of any game history that has not been updated.

  In this embodiment, the specific condition that the password is assumed to be an input error is that only one character is different by one character before and after, but the password registered in the management server 1200 is updated. The password included in the request may be anything that is similar to each other and it is assumed that there is a high possibility of an input error, and it is applied as a specific condition only that both passwords differ by only one character. Alternatively, it may be applied as a specific condition by having a difference of one character before and after two characters. In addition, when different characters in both passwords are characters that are likely to be mistaken, such as “O” and “0”, even if a similar condition such as a difference between uppercase and lowercase letters is applied as a specific condition good.

  Further, as in the present embodiment, if any one or more of these are satisfied, the password included in the update request may be authenticated, and if any one is satisfied, it is included in the update request. It can be used to authenticate the password.

  In the present embodiment, the game history managed by the management server 1200 includes data that may interfere with continuity such as level, story stage, and production settings. Since a two-dimensional code that can specify a game history including data that may interfere with continuity is output, the password registered in the management server 1200 and the password included in the update request must match. If the player who made the update request is authenticated as the player who has issued the password, assuming that a specific condition that is presumed to be an input error is satisfied, the corresponding terminal identification information in the player database Achievement items that can appear at the level value of the corresponding terminal identification information registered in the player database among the total number of games, the number of BBs, the number of RBs Only items that do not affect the continuity of the game history, such as the type of action, are updated. However, all the game histories managed by the management server 1200 are data that does not impair the continuity. If there is no restriction as described above, the password registered in the management server 1200 does not match the password included in the update request, and the update request Even when the performed player is authenticated as the player who has issued the password, all corresponding items of the corresponding terminal identification information in the player database can be updated.

  In the management server 1200 of the present embodiment, when a password issuance request is accepted, issuance of a password is not prohibited even if the status of the corresponding terminal identification information is in game, and in this situation Even when a new password issuance request is received, a new password is issued. If a password is issued, but no game is played or a two-dimensional code is played, If it is not acquired, even if the two-dimensional code is acquired but no update request is made, it is possible to receive a new password without performing access for releasing the password.

  In addition, even if the game history specified from the two-dimensional code acquired by playing the game after the password is issued is reflected in the game history managed by the management server 1200, the level or story reflected at the next password issue There is a possibility that the same password may be issued without changing the stage and the production setting.

  As described above, when a password issuance request is accepted, even if the status of the corresponding terminal identification information is in game, the issuance of password is not prohibited. If you finish the game before changing the production settings and get a two-dimensional code, you can make an update request with the same two-dimensional code as many times as you like. There may be a problem that the game history such as the number of games, the number of BBs, and the number of RBs can be updated many times.

  For this reason, in the present embodiment, when the management server 1200 issues a password, it is determined whether or not it matches the password registered in the corresponding terminal identification information in the player database, that is, the previously issued password. If they match, the same password is not continuously issued to the same player by generating the password again until it is determined that it does not match the previous password in the procedure described above. In addition, when the management server 1200 receives an update request, the password and game random number specified from the update request and the password registered in the game history database in association with the terminal identification information specified from the update request And game random numbers, that is, passwords and game random numbers specified from past update requests, Only when it adapted to update the corresponding entry of the corresponding terminal identification information of the player database based on the game history identified from the update request. As described above, although the same password is not issued continuously, if the password is not consecutive, it is possible that the same password is issued. However, even if the same password is issued, the combination of the game random number added to the two-dimensional code and the password can hardly be the same (the probability that the 32-bit game random number matches) 1/4294967296, and even if the game history is the same, the probability that the game random number matches the password is even lower). As described above, the password and game random number specified from the update request and the password and game random number registered in the game history database in association with the terminal identification information specified from the update request, that is, from the past update request. Since the game history is updated on condition that the specified password and game random number do not match, when the password issuance request is accepted, even if the status of the corresponding terminal identification information is in game Even if the password issuance is not prohibited, by making an update request with the same two-dimensional code as many times as possible, the number of games, the number of BBs, The game history such as the number of RBs cannot be updated many times.

  In the present embodiment, when the management server 1200 receives an update request, it is registered in association with the password and game random number specified from the update request and the terminal identification information specified from the update request in the game history database. The password and the game random number that are specified, that is, the password and the game random number that are specified from the past update request are collated, and only if they do not match, the corresponding in the player database is based on the game history specified from the update request The corresponding item of the terminal identification information is updated, and the number of games, the number of BBs, and the number of RBs are obtained by making an update request with the same two-dimensional code as many times as possible, even though the game is played only once. It is preferable from the point that it can be surely prevented that the game history can be updated many times, but the management server 1200 has received an update request. In addition, the password and game random number specified from the current update request are compared with the password and game random number specified from the previous update request, and based on the game history specified from the update request only if they do not match Even if the corresponding item of the corresponding terminal identification information in the player database is updated, the password issuance will be issued even if the status of the corresponding terminal identification information is in game when the password issuance request is accepted. Even if the configuration is not prohibited, the number of games, the number of BBs, the number of RBs, etc., even though the game is played only once by making an update request with the same two-dimensional code as many times as possible. The game history can be prevented from being updated many times.

  In addition, when the management server 1200 issues a password as described above, the management server 1200 receives an update request if the same password is not continuously issued to the same player. The password specified from the current update request and the password specified from the previous update request are collated, and only if they do not match, the corresponding in the player database is based on the game history specified from the update request. The corresponding item of the terminal identification information may be updated. Even in such a configuration, when a password issuance request is accepted, the password is not changed even if the status of the corresponding terminal identification information is in game. Even in a configuration where issuance is not prohibited, a game is played only once by making an update request many times with the same two-dimensional code. Despite the stomach, the number of games and BB number of times, many times the game history, such as RB number of times can be prevented from being able to update.

  In addition, when the management server 1200 issues a password as described above, a password is generated using not only the game history but also a random number (random value and hash value), in particular, compared with the previous password. Even if it is not confirmed whether or not they are the same, the probability that the same password is issued continuously is very low. For this reason, even when the same password is not continuously issued, a password is generated using a random number (random value and hash value) and the management server 1200 receives an update request. The password specified from the current update request and the password specified from the previous update request are collated, and only if they do not match, the corresponding in the player database is based on the game history specified from the update request. By configuring the corresponding item of terminal identification information to be updated, when a password issuance request is accepted, password issuance is not prohibited even if the status of the corresponding terminal identification information is in game. Even if it is a structure, a game is played only once by making an update request many times with the same two-dimensional code. And BB number of times, many times the game history, such as RB number of times can be prevented from being able to update. Note that the password specified from the current update request is compared not only with the password specified from the previous update request, but also with all passwords issued in the past for the same player (portable terminal with terminal identification information). If the configuration is such that the corresponding item of the corresponding terminal identification information in the player database is updated based on the game history specified from the update request on condition that they do not match, the same two-dimensional code is updated many times. By making the request, it is possible to more reliably prevent the game history such as the number of games, the number of BBs, and the number of RBs from being updated many times even though the game is played only once.

  In addition, if a random game random number is added every time a two-dimensional code is issued as described above, the management server 1200 adds a random number in addition to the game history or issues the same password continuously. Even when the management server 1200 receives an update request, the game random number identified from the current update request is compared with the game random number identified from the previous update request, Only when they do not match, the corresponding item of the corresponding terminal identification information in the player database may be updated based on the game history specified from the update request. Even when the request is accepted, even if the password issuance is not prohibited even if the status of the corresponding terminal identification information is in game, the same two-dimensional code By performing any number of times update request, the player can be prevented that despite the do not go only once, the number of games and BB number of times, many times the game history, such as RB number of times she can update. Note that the game random number specified from the current update request is not only the game random number specified from the previous update request, but also the game history when the same player (the mobile terminal of the terminal identification information) made the update request. If the corresponding item of the corresponding terminal identification information in the player database is updated based on the game history specified from the update request, on the condition that all the game random numbers are checked and do not match, the same two-dimensional By making an update request with the code as many times as possible, the game history such as the number of games, the number of BBs, the number of RBs, etc. can be updated many times even though the game is played only once. Can be prevented.

  In the present embodiment, when the management server 1200 issues a password, a random number is acquired and a bit constituting a random number is set between bits in a plurality of bits created by setting a game history. Passwords are generated based on the data obtained by inserting the password as a hash value, and even if the game history is similar, it is difficult for the password to be similar, so the password can be analyzed or falsified It becomes difficult to do.

  In addition, the hash value may be any value as long as it is inserted at a predetermined location between bits, but in the present embodiment, between the bits in a plurality of bits of data constituting one item of the game history (for example, , Among the 8 bits constituting the level value) and the bits constituting one item of the game history and the bits constituting the other item of the game history (composing an anniversary with the bits constituting the level value) Since the hash value is inserted in both of the passwords, the password can be further varied.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the management server 1200 issues a password, a random number is acquired, and the multi-bit data created by setting the game history is shifted by the acquired random number (random value). In addition, since a random value is added to the data after the shift, and the bit constituting the game history item can change every time it is issued, the password is the same even if the game history is the same. Since it becomes difficult to become a thing, it becomes difficult to analyze and tamper with the password.

  In the present embodiment, when the management server 1200 issues a password, the multi-bit data created by setting the game history is converted into characters according to the password analysis table shown in FIG. However, the relationship between the numerical value and the character in the password analysis table is not in the regular order as shown in FIG. 16A, for example, “A” “B” “C” “D” “E” ... Are not in the order of regular “0”, “1”, “2”, “3”, “4”, etc., but “10”, “3”, “22”, “8”, “5”, etc. By using an irregular order, it becomes difficult to digitize passwords, and it becomes more difficult to analyze and falsify passwords.

  In the present embodiment, if the player is already registered in the player database of the management server 1200, the game is started simply by pressing and holding the effect switch 56 without receiving a password. It becomes possible. Then, a two-dimensional code capable of specifying the game history from when the game start operation is performed in response to the long press of the effect switch 56 until the end is displayed. By making a simple update request to the management server 1200 based on the two-dimensional code displayed at the end of the game, on the management server 1200 side, first, the terminal identification information of the mobile terminal that transmitted the simple update request is managed. It is determined whether or not already registered in the player database of the server 1200. If already registered, the game history corresponding to the corresponding terminal identification information is updated to the game history specified from the registration request. It will be. For this reason, even a player whose terminal identification information has already been registered in the player database can use the game history storage function without receiving a password, and then the game end operation By simply accessing the management server 1200 with the two-dimensional code displayed by the above, it is possible to register and store the game history during that time in the management server 1200. For this reason, even a player who wants to start a game immediately can use the function to accumulate the game history without issuing or entering a password and receive a privilege based on the accumulated game history It becomes.

  In particular, in the present embodiment, since the use of the function for accumulating the game history can be started by simply pressing and holding the effect switch 56 once, the game history is accumulated even for the player who has started the game immediately. The function to do can be used easily.

  In the present embodiment, the management server 1200 counts the number of times that a simple update request is made for terminal identification information that has already been registered, that is, the number of times that a game is played without receiving a password. It is determined whether or not the number of times is equal to or greater than a certain number. If the number is equal to or greater than the certain number, a password recommendation guide for recommending playing a game upon receiving a password is notified to the portable terminal. In this password recommendation guidance, by receiving a password issuance and playing a game, the level, story, production setting, etc. can be taken over, and by raising the level, an effect that will not be performed unless a password is issued is executed. The game history will be reflected in the production by using the password for the player who is playing the game without receiving the password. Can effectively promote the use of functions that can be used.

  In the present embodiment, the password recommendation guidance is notified when the number of times that the simple update request is made exceeds a certain number, but it may be notified at another timing. In the present embodiment, as described above, there are provided effects that are executed on condition that the cumulative number of games, the cumulative number of bonuses, etc. are a certain number or more. Missions that are achieved by executing an effect that does not appear unless the cumulative bonus number is greater than or equal to a certain number, that is, missions that cannot be achieved unless the cumulative game number or cumulative bonus number is greater than or equal to a certain number are defined. For this reason, at the timing when the cumulative number of games and the cumulative number of bonuses, etc., in the game history of the player who made the simple update request become a certain number of times or more, that is, when the game history meets the appearance condition of the production. Password recommendation guidance may be provided, and even in such a configuration, the game history is reflected in the production by using the password for the player who is playing the game without receiving the password issuance It is possible to effectively encourage the use of functions that are possible. In addition, when password recommended guidance is performed at a timing when the game history satisfies the appearance condition of the effect, the game history satisfies the appearance condition of the effect, so that a new effect can be executed. It is preferable to notify that the mission can be achieved and that there is a possibility that a privilege will be newly granted. By doing so, it is possible to reflect the game history in the production by using the password. It is possible to promote the use of functions more effectively.

  Also, in this embodiment, by inputting “Easy Start” in the slot machine 1, a starting random number is obtained, and a two-dimensional code that can identify the starting random number is displayed, and a password is input. Without playing the game, it is possible to play a game in the same manner as when a password is input. Then, at the end of the game, a two-dimensional code that can specify the game history from the input of “easy start” to the end and the starting random number acquired when the “easy start” is input is displayed. Then, the player makes a start registration request to the management server 1200 based on the two-dimensional code displayed at the start of the game, and registers the terminal identification information of the mobile terminal and the start random number in the temporary registration database. By making a registration request at the end to the management server 1200 based on the two-dimensional code displayed at the end of the game, the management server 1200 side starts the random number at the start specified from the registration request at the end, the management server 1200 On the condition that the starting random number registered in the temporary registration database matches the starting random number sent in the starting registration request, that is, The player's terminal identification information and game history are newly registered in the player database of the management server 1200, and the next time the password is issued, It is possible to take over the gravel. For this reason, a player who uses the game history storage function for the first time does not need to access the management server 1200 in advance and register as a member before playing a game. The two-dimensional code displayed by inputting “easy start” In this case, it is possible to start a game similar to the case where the password is input by accessing the management server 1200 once, and then access the management server 1200 with the two-dimensional code displayed by the end operation of the game. Thus, it is possible to register and store the game history during that time in the player database of the management server 1200.

  Further, the terminal identification information registered in the temporary registration database by the start registration request and the start random number coincide with the start random number included in the end registration request, and the game history specified from the start random number is registered. In this case, the starting random number generated for one player can be prevented from being misappropriated by other players, and the diversion by other players can be prevented. Since the management server 1200 only needs to determine whether terminal identification information and a starting random number matching the temporary registration database are registered, the load on the management server 1200 can be reduced.

  In this embodiment, the terminal identification information registered in the temporary registration database, the corresponding start random number, and the registration date and time are up to the next day of the registration date even if the main registration is not performed due to the end registration request. However, after that, even if the main registration is not performed due to the registration request at the time of termination, the temporary registration information that is unlikely to match is erased as the predetermined period elapses Therefore, it is not necessary to press the storage capacity of the management server 1200.

  In this embodiment, a time limit is set for erasing the temporary registration information two days after the registration date, that is, in units of dates, but the temporary registration information is deleted when a certain time has passed since the registration. Even in such a configuration, the storage capacity of the management server 1200 does not have to be pressed as described above.

  In the present embodiment, only the mobile terminal to which the terminal identification information is given and the terminal identification information is permitted to be transmitted is permitted to be accessed by the management server 1200. The player is specified based on the terminal identification information given to the terminal, and it is possible to effectively prevent unauthorized use of other people's information.

  The first embodiment of the present invention has been described above with reference to the drawings. However, the present invention is not limited to the first embodiment, and modifications and additions within a scope that does not depart from the gist of the present invention. Needless to say, it is included in the present invention.

  For example, in the first embodiment, a slot machine is applied as a gaming machine, but information input means that can specify the gaming history from the outside and information that can specify the gaming history on the gaming machine are output. Any gaming machine provided with output means may be used, and a pachinko gaming machine may be used.

  In the first embodiment, a password is applied as information that can specify a game history to be input to the gaming machine, and it is not necessary to provide a dedicated reading device or the like for inputting information from the outside. However, it may be data that can be encoded by a barcode reader, two-dimensional code, etc. and can be read by a code reader, data that can be input by wired connection, wireless connection, infrared connection, etc. With this configuration, it is possible to easily input these data.

  In the first embodiment, the two-dimensional code is applied as information that can specify the game history output from the gaming machine, and the player can easily acquire the data simply by holding the two-dimensional code reader. However, it may be output by other code data that can be read by a code reader such as a barcode, or may be data that can be output by wired connection, wireless connection, infrared connection, etc. Furthermore, a password may be applied in the same manner as information input to the gaming machine.

  In the gaming system 1001 of the first embodiment, a privilege is given according to the player's game history stored in the player database of the management server 1200, but at least in the gaming machine As long as the game history is specified from the password that has been specified and the production reflects the specified game history, it is not always necessary to provide a privilege according to the game history. Even if you acquire another person's two-dimensional code, the game history specified from the two-dimensional code cannot be reflected in your own game history. While it is possible to take over, it becomes impossible for a player other than the player who has issued the password to take over the game history. As a result, it is meaningless to divert or steal a password or a two-dimensional code. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the diversion or theft of a password and a two-dimensional code. As a result, it is possible to prevent the value of the performance reflecting the game history from being significantly reduced, such as illegally manipulating the game history using another person's password or the like and reflecting the game history in the performance. .

  In the first embodiment, when a game is performed by performing temporary registration at “Easy Start”, a starting random number extracted from random numbers that fluctuate within a certain range is applied as information that can identify the game. However, any data can be used as long as the management server 1200 can identify the game at the end of the game. For example, data that regularly changes such as a number to be added every time “easy start” is input is applied. May be.

  In the first embodiment, the management server 1200 permits access only to portable terminals to which terminal identification information is assigned and to which transmission of terminal identification information is permitted. The terminal identification information is given when the player can be identified by at least information (Cookie) that can identify the mobile terminal, or by the player ID assigned on the management server 1200 side. The access may be permitted from a terminal that has not been permitted to transmit terminal identification information.

  In the first embodiment, information related to the player (such as a game history) is managed in association with the terminal identification information. However, the information related to the player is associated with the player ID that can identify the player. A configuration for managing information may be used.

[Second Embodiment]
Next, a description will be given of a second embodiment of a slot machine, a management server, and a gaming system 1001 comprising these to which the present invention is applied. Since the present embodiment has a configuration common to the first embodiment described above, the configuration different from the first embodiment will be mainly described here.

  In the slot machine 1 according to the first embodiment described above, when a player whose terminal identification information is not registered in the player database uses a function for accumulating a game history for the first time, “Easy start” is input. On the other hand, a two-dimensional code is displayed, and it is possible to play a game in the same way as when a password is entered without entering a password, whereas a two-dimensional code is displayed at the end of the game. Thus, in the slot machine of the present embodiment, even if a player whose terminal identification information is not registered in the player database uses the function of accumulating the game history for the first time, only “easy start” is input. Thus, it is possible to start a game capable of storing a game history without inputting a password. At this time, the two-dimensional code is not displayed and it is not necessary to access the management server 1200.

  Specifically, in the slot machine of the present embodiment, when “easy start” is selected, the values of the personal history storage areas (total number of games, number of BBs, number of RBs, achievement mission) assigned to the RAM 91c are initialized. .

  In the personal history storage area, game histories (total number of games, number of BBs, number of RBs) since “easy start” is selected are accumulated. Furthermore, when a mission (issue) set in advance in the slot machine is achieved as in the case where a password is input, a history of achievement missions indicating the types of missions achieved is also accumulated. However, in the case of an easy start, unlike the case of entering a password, no points are given, the level does not increase, and the production setting cannot be changed from the default setting.

  Then, when the player finishes the game, when performing the game end operation (select “2D code creation” on the main menu screen), the game random number is acquired from the random number updated within a certain range, The current date / time information is acquired, and a two-dimensional code for the end of the game is generated and displayed from the game history, game random number, and date / time information after “easy start” is input.

  Then, the player obtains the displayed two-dimensional code with a portable terminal and accesses the management server 1200, so that a player who has played a game for the first time has a game history specified from the two-dimensional code. In addition, the terminal identification information of the portable terminal possessed by the player can be registered in the player database, and when the player after the second time inputs “easy start” and plays a game, the two-dimensional code Can be reflected in the game history registered in the player database corresponding to the terminal identification information of the portable terminal possessed by the player.

  The two-dimensional code displayed when the game is ended after selecting “Easy Start” and starting the game indicates the location of the update page on the management server 1200, unlike when the game is started by entering a password. The URL, the game random number acquired at the end of the game, the total number of games stored in the personal history storage area, the number of BBs, the number of RBs, and the type of mission accomplished are stored.

  Then, the two-dimensional code is read by the portable terminal 1100, and the URL of the management server 1200 specified by the two-dimensional code is accessed, so that the terminal identification information (SIM data) of the accessed portable terminal is already registered in the player database. When the terminal identification information (SIM data) of the accessed mobile terminal is already registered, the game history corresponding to the matching terminal identification information is updated. .

  On the other hand, when the terminal identification information (SIM data) of the accessed mobile terminal is not registered, data in which the combination of the game random number specified from the two-dimensional code and the date information (game date) matches in the game history database. It is determined whether or not it is registered, and on the condition that no matching data is registered, the terminal identification information of the accessed mobile terminal is newly registered and specified from the two-dimensional code in association with the terminal identification information The game history to be played is newly registered, and thereafter, it becomes possible to receive a password based on these data.

  As described above, in the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, it is possible to play a game in the same manner as when a password is input without inputting a password simply by inputting “easy start”. At the end of the game, a two-dimensional code that can specify the game history from the input of “easy start” to the end, the game random number acquired at the end, and date / time information is displayed. Then, by accessing the management server 1200 with the two-dimensional code displayed at the end of the game, on the management server 1200 side, the game random number and date / time information (game date / time) specified from the two-dimensional code transmitted at the end of the game , And the game history specified by the two-dimensional code, that is, the player, on the condition that the combination of the game random number and the date / time information (game date / time) registered in the management server 1200 do not match It is possible to register a new game history. Therefore, a player who uses the game history storage function for the first time does not need to access the management server 1200 in advance to register as a member before playing a game. It becomes possible to use the storage function, and thereafter, it is possible to register and store the game history in the management server 1200 only by accessing the management server 1200 with the two-dimensional code displayed by the game end operation. Become.

  In the present embodiment, even a player who plays a game for the second time or later can start a game by simply inputting “Easy Start” without receiving a password. In this case as well as the first player, at the end of the game, it is possible to specify the game history from the input of "Easy Start" to the end, the game random number obtained at the end, and date information (game date and time) A two-dimensional code is displayed. Then, by accessing the management server 1200 with the two-dimensional code displayed at the end of the game, the management server 1200 first has the terminal identification information of the mobile terminal that transmitted the game history as the player of the management server 1200. It is determined whether or not it is already registered in the database, and if it is already registered, the game history corresponding to the corresponding terminal identification information is updated to the game history specified from the two-dimensional code. For this reason, even if the player is used for the second time or later, that is, a player whose terminal identification information is already registered in the player database, the game history storage function is used without receiving a password. After that, only by accessing the management server 1200 with the two-dimensional code displayed by the game end operation, the game history during that time can be registered and accumulated in the management server 1200.

  In the first embodiment described above, the management server 1200 includes a temporary registration database, whereas the management server 1200 according to the present embodiment does not include a temporary registration database.

  Next, operations of the management server 1200 and the slot machine 1 when the player inputs “easy start” and plays a game in the slot machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 36, when “simple start” is selected in the slot machine 1, the game history is initialized and the normal effect mode is shifted to the specific effect mode.

  When the player ends the game and selects “Create 2-D Code” from the main menu screen, the game random number and the current date and time are obtained from the random numbers updated within a certain range, and the acquired game random number and the current date and time are displayed. The date and time information shown, the total number of games stored in the personal history storage area, the number of BBs, the number of RBs, and the type of mission accomplished are acquired from these data and the URL indicating the location of the update page. A dimension code is generated, displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 and stored, and the personal history storage area is initialized, and the specific effect mode is shifted to the normal effect mode.

  The player reads the two-dimensional code displayed on the portable terminal 1100 and sends a registration request including the game random number, date / time information, game history, and terminal identification information of the portable terminal 1100 analyzed from the two-dimensional code to the management server 1200. As a result, the player who has played the game for the first time can register the terminal identification information and the game history in the player database of the management server 1200, and the second and subsequent significant persons can perform “simple start”. When a game is input and played, the game history can be reflected in the player database.

  When a registration request is made from the portable terminal 1100, the management server 1200 determines whether or not a certain period (two days in the present embodiment) has elapsed from the date and time of generation of the two-dimensional code from the date and time information specified from the registration request. If a certain period has elapsed, the mobile terminal is notified that registration is impossible.

  If a certain period has not elapsed since the generation date and time of the two-dimensional code, it is determined whether or not the terminal identification information of the mobile terminal that made the registration request matches the terminal identification information registered in the player database. If the terminal identification information matches, the game history and game random number specified from the registration request and the game history and game random number registered in the game history database in association with the terminal identification information specified from the registration request And, in the case of not matching, update the corresponding item of the corresponding terminal identification information in the player database based on the game history specified from the registration request, The date / time information (game date / time), the game history and the game random number specified from the registration request in association with the terminal identification information are registered in the game history database, and the corresponding terminal identifier is registered. It updates the status information while waiting, and notifies the registration completion to the portable terminal 1100 of performing a registration request.

  Note that the game history specified from the registration request is only the total number of games, the number of BBs, the number of RBs, and the types of missions completed, and other items are not updated in the registration request.

  On the other hand, when the game history and game random number specified from the registration request match the game history and game random number registered in the game history database in association with the terminal identification information specified from the registration request, Since there is a very high possibility that the registration request is the same as the two-dimensional code used for the previous registration request, the mobile terminal is notified that the registration is impossible.

  In addition, for terminal identification information that has already been registered, the number of registration requests, that is, the number of times of playing a game without receiving a password is counted. If it is 5 times or more, a password recommendation guide for recommending that a game is issued upon receipt of a password is notified to the portable terminal.

  In the recommended password guidance, by playing a game after receiving a password, you can take over the level, story stage, production settings, etc. Therefore, the content prompting the user to receive a password is provided.

  In addition, if the terminal identification information of the mobile terminal that has made the registration request does not match the terminal identification information registered in the player database, the game random number and date / time information (game) registered in the game history database It is determined whether or not the combination of the game random number and the date and time information (game date and time) specified from the registration request matches the combination of the game random number and the date and time information (game date and time). Is highly likely to be a registration request using the same two-dimensional code used for the previous registration request, and therefore notifies the mobile terminal that the registration is impossible.

  If the combination of the game random number and date / time information (game date / time) does not match, the terminal identification information of the mobile terminal that has made the registration request is newly registered in the player database, and the terminal identification information Correspondingly, the game history specified from the registration request at the end is registered in the player database, and the completion of the main registration is notified to the portable terminal that has made the registration request at the end.

  In addition, when the combination of the random number at game time and the date / time information (game date / time) does not match, the terminal identification information of the mobile terminal that has requested registration is newly registered in the player database, and at the same time, the game history database In addition, the game random number specified from the registration request, date and time information (game date and time), and the game history specified from the registration request are registered in association with each other.

  As described above, in the gaming system 1001 of the present embodiment, it is possible to perform a game just by inputting “Easy Start” in the slot machine 1 and entering a password without entering a password. It becomes possible. Then, at the end of the game, a two-dimensional code that can specify the game history from the input of “easy start” to the end, the game random number acquired at the end, and date information (game date) is displayed. The player makes a registration request to the management server 1200 based on the two-dimensional code displayed at the end of the game, so that the management server 1200 side plays game random numbers and date / time information (game) The combination of the game random number and the date information (game date) registered in the game history database of the management server 1200 does not match the game history specified from the registration request, that is, The terminal identification information and game history of the player can be newly registered in the player database of the management server 1200, and the game history can be taken over upon receipt of a password from the next time. Therefore, a player who uses the game history storage function for the first time does not need to access the management server 1200 in advance to register as a member before playing a game. The storage function can be used, and thereafter, the game history during that time is registered and stored in the player database of the management server 1200 simply by accessing the management server 1200 with the two-dimensional code displayed by the game end operation. It becomes possible.

  In the present embodiment, even a player who plays a game for the second time or later can start a game by simply inputting “Easy Start” without receiving a password. In this case as well as the first player, at the end of the game, it is possible to specify the game history from the input of "Easy Start" to the end, the game random number obtained at the end, and date information (game date and time) A two-dimensional code is displayed. By making a registration request to the management server 1200 based on the two-dimensional code displayed at the end of the game, on the management server 1200 side, first, the terminal identification information of the mobile terminal that transmitted the game history is the management server 1200. Whether the game history corresponding to the corresponding terminal identification information is updated to the game history specified from the registration request; Become. For this reason, even if the player is used for the second time or later, that is, a player whose terminal identification information is already registered in the player database, the game history storage function is used without receiving a password. After that, only by accessing the management server 1200 with the two-dimensional code displayed by the game end operation, the game history during that time can be registered and accumulated in the management server 1200.

  In the present embodiment, both the player whose terminal identification information is not registered in the player database and the player whose terminal identification information is already registered input “Easy Start”. Since it is possible to start the game simply by doing, there is no need to change the start operation one by one depending on whether or not it is the first time. In addition, the processing at the start and end of the game in the slot machine can be made common, and also in the management server 1200, when a player whose terminal identification information is not registered in the player database makes a registration request, The processing can be made common when a player whose identification information has already been registered makes a registration request.

  If the combination of the random number at the end and the date / time information do not match and a new game history is registered, the combination of the game random number and date / time information (game date / time) included in the registration request is registered in the game history database. Therefore, the combination of the game random number and date / time information (game date / time) generated for one player can be prevented from being diverted by other players, and the diversion by other players can also be prevented. In doing so, the management server 1200 only needs to determine whether or not a combination of a game random number and date / time information (game date / time) is registered, so the load on the management server 1200 can be reduced.

  In the present embodiment, the management server 1200 counts the number of registration requests made for terminal identification information that has already been registered, that is, the number of games played without receiving a password. It is determined whether or not the number of times is equal to or greater than a certain number. If the number is equal to or greater than the certain number, a password recommendation guide for recommending playing a game upon receiving a password is notified to the portable terminal. In this password recommendation guide, you can take over the level, story stage, production settings, etc. by playing the game with the password issued, and the production that will not be performed if you do not receive the password issued by raising the level The game history will be reflected in the production by using the password for players who are playing without receiving the password. It is possible to effectively promote the use of functions that can be performed.

  In the present embodiment, the password recommendation guidance is notified when the number of registration requests made exceeds a certain number, but it may be notified at other timings. In the present embodiment, as described above, there are provided effects that are executed on condition that the cumulative number of games, the cumulative number of bonuses, etc. are a certain number or more. Missions that are achieved by executing an effect that does not appear unless the cumulative bonus number is greater than or equal to a certain number, that is, missions that cannot be achieved unless the cumulative game number or cumulative bonus number is greater than or equal to a certain number are defined. For this reason, at the timing when the cumulative number of games and the cumulative number of bonuses, etc., in the game history of the player who made the simple update request become a certain number of times or more, that is, when the game history meets the appearance condition of the production. Password recommendation guidance may be provided, and even in such a configuration, the game history is reflected in the production by using the password for the player who is playing the game without receiving the password issuance It is possible to effectively encourage the use of functions that are possible. In addition, when password recommended guidance is performed at a timing when the game history satisfies the appearance condition of the effect, the game history satisfies the appearance condition of the effect, so that a new effect can be executed. It is preferable to notify that the mission can be achieved and that there is a possibility that a privilege will be newly granted. By doing so, it is possible to reflect the game history in the production by using the password. It is possible to promote the use of functions more effectively.

  The second embodiment of the present invention has been described above. However, the present invention is not limited to this second embodiment, and there are changes and additions within the scope of the present invention. Needless to say, these are also included in the present invention. In addition, the same or similar configuration as the first embodiment has the same effect as that described in the first embodiment. Moreover, the modification illustrated about 1st Embodiment is applicable to 2nd Embodiment.

  In the second embodiment, the game random number and date / time information extracted from random numbers that fluctuate within a certain range as information that can identify the game when the game is ended after performing the game with “easy start” (Game date and time) is applied, but any data can be used as long as the management server 1200 can identify the game at the end of the game. For example, either a game random number or date and time information may be used. Data that regularly changes such as a number to be added each time “” may be applied. Moreover, you may apply combining these data.

  In the second embodiment, the main menu screen is displayed and the game is started using the game history storage function by inputting “easy start”. However, the first embodiment described above is used. Similarly to the above-mentioned form, it may be configured such that a game using the game history storage function can be started only by performing one of the switches once. In this way, a player who has started a game immediately can be used. However, the function of accumulating the game history can be easily used.

[Summary of the first embodiment and the second embodiment]
The gaming system of configuration 1, which is the gaming system 1001 in the first embodiment and the second embodiment described above,
A gaming machine (slot machine 1) capable of performing a predetermined game;
A management device (management server 1200) for managing a game history that is a result of a player playing a game on the gaming machine;
In a gaming system consisting of
The management device (management server 1200)
A game history storage means (player database) for storing a player's game history in association with player identification information (terminal identification information) capable of identifying the player;
An issue request acceptance means for accepting a password issue request;
A password issuing means for issuing a password when receiving the issue request;
Password distribution means for distributing the password issued by the password issuing means to the player who made the issue request;
A password registration means for registering the password issued by the password issuing means in association with the player identification information of the player who made the issue request when distributing the password in accordance with the issue request;
With
The gaming machine (slot machine 1)
Password input means for inputting the password (stop switch 8L, 8C, 8R, MAXBET switch 6, password input screen),
Game history information generating means for generating game history information (two-dimensional code) capable of specifying a new game history as a result of a player who has entered a password by the password input means playing a game on the gaming machine;
Game history information output means for outputting the game history information generated by the game history information generation means;
With
The game history information generating means generates the game history information (two-dimensional code) including information capable of specifying the password input by the password input means,
The management device (management server 1200)
An update request receiving means for receiving an update request including information that can specify a game history and a password specified from the game history information (two-dimensional code);
When the update request is received, a password registered in association with the player identification information (terminal identification information) of the player who made the update request, and a password specified from the information included in the update request And authentication means for authenticating the player who made the update request based on
On the condition that the authentication means has authenticated, the game history stored in the game history storage means (player database) in association with the player identification information (terminal identification information) of the player who made the update request Game history update means for updating the game history based on the new game history specified from the information included in the update request,
Further comprising
In the authentication means, the password registered in association with the player identification information (terminal identification information) of the player who made the update request matches the password specified from the information included in the update request. In such a case, the player who has made the update request is authenticated, the password registered in association with the player identification information (terminal identification information) of the player who has made the update request, and the update request Even if the password specified from the included information does not match, the player who has made the update request is authenticated when a specific condition is satisfied.

  According to this feature, by issuing a password issuance request, the password is acquired and input when the game is started, and at the end of the game, the game history information is acquired and an update request is made to obtain a new game history. In addition to updating, when the management device receives an update request, a password registered corresponding to the corresponding player identification information, that is, a password acquired by the player at the time of issuance, and a password included in the game history information, , The game history corresponding to the corresponding player identification information is updated based on the game history specified from the game history information. For this reason, a player inputs a simple password at the start of the game without acquiring a complicated ID, etc., acquires game history information at the end of the game, and accumulates the game history only by accessing the management device In addition, the game history is not updated unless the management device is authenticated based on the password issued from the management device and the password specified from the game history information. Spoofing can also be prevented.

  In addition, when the management device receives an update request, if the password registered corresponding to the corresponding player identification information matches the password included in the game history information, of course, the update request When the player who performed the game is authenticated and the game history is updated, the password registered corresponding to the player identification information does not match the password included in the game history information However, if a specific condition is met, the player who made the update request is authenticated and the game history is updated. Therefore, even if the player incorrectly enters the password, the specific condition is met. If the error is within the range, it is possible to update the game history, and it is possible to prevent the game history that has been played during that time from being wasted.

The management apparatus of configuration 2 that is the management apparatus in the first embodiment and the second embodiment described above,
A management device (management server 1200) for managing a game history that is a result of a player playing a game on a gaming machine (slot machine 1),
A game history storage means (player database) for storing a player's game history in association with player identification information (terminal identification information) capable of identifying the player;
An issue request acceptance means for accepting a password issue request;
A password issuing means for issuing a password when receiving the issue request;
Password distribution means for distributing the password issued by the password issuing means to the player who made the issue request;
A password registration means for registering the password issued by the password issuing means in association with the player identification information of the player who made the issue request when distributing the password in accordance with the issue request;
Update request receiving means for receiving an update request including the password and game history specified from the game history information (two-dimensional code) output from the gaming machine and capable of specifying the password and game history;
When the update request is received, a password registered in association with the player identification information (terminal identification information) of the player who made the update request, and a password specified from the information included in the update request And authentication means for authenticating the player who made the update request based on
On the condition that the authentication means has authenticated, the game history stored in the game history storage means (player database) in association with the player identification information (terminal identification information) of the player who made the update request Game history update means for updating the game history based on the new game history specified from the information included in the update request,
With
In the authentication means, the password registered in association with the player identification information (terminal identification information) of the player who made the update request matches the password specified from the information included in the update request. In such a case, the player who has made the update request is authenticated, the password registered in association with the player identification information (terminal identification information) of the player who has made the update request, and the update request Even if the password specified from the included information does not match, the player who has made the update request is authenticated when a specific condition is satisfied.

  According to this feature, by issuing a password issuance request, the password is acquired and input when the game is started, and at the end of the game, the game history information is acquired and an update request is made to obtain a new game history. Based on the password registered corresponding to the corresponding player identification information, that is, the password acquired by the player at the time of issuance and the password included in the game history information by receiving the update request Only when authentication is performed, the game history corresponding to the corresponding player identification information is updated based on the game history specified from the game history information. For this reason, a player inputs a simple password at the start of the game without acquiring a complicated ID, etc., acquires game history information at the end of the game, and accumulates the game history only by accessing the management device In addition, the game history is not updated unless the management device is authenticated based on the password issued from the management device and the password specified from the game history information. Spoofing can also be prevented.

  In addition, when the update request is received, if the password registered corresponding to the corresponding player identification information matches the password included in the game history information, the update request is naturally made. The player is authenticated and the game history is updated. Even if the password registered corresponding to the player identification information does not match the password included in the game history information If the condition is satisfied, the player who made the update request is authenticated and the game history is updated, so even if the player incorrectly enters the password, the error within the range that satisfies the specific condition If so, it is possible to update the game history, and it is possible to prevent the game history that has been played during that time from being wasted.

  In the case of satisfying a specific condition in configurations 1 and 2, for example, the difference between the password registered corresponding to the corresponding player identification information and the password included in the game history information is one character. When only two characters are different, when different characters are likely to be mistaken, such as “O” and “0”, or when both passwords have similarities, such as differences in uppercase and lowercase letters And so on.

The gaming system of configuration 3, which is the gaming system 1001 in the first embodiment and the second embodiment described above, is the gaming system described in configuration 1,
The game history update means is specified by the authentication means from the password registered in association with the player identification information (terminal identification information) of the player who has made the update request, and information included in the update request. If the player who made the update request is authenticated by satisfying a specific condition, the player identification information (terminal identification information) of the player who made the update request is not included. Of the game histories stored in association with the game history storage means (player database), only a specific type of game history is updated based on the new game history specified from the information included in the update request. It is characterized by.

  According to this feature, even if the player enters the password incorrectly, the game history can be updated as long as the error is within a range that satisfies a specific condition. While it is possible to prevent the history from being wasted, there is an effect on the game history at the end of the game depending on the game history that has a problem in continuity due to the input of an incorrect password, that is, the content specified from the password. Since a certain game history will not be updated, a game history with such a continuity problem will be updated by mistake, resulting in a conflict between the previous game history and the game history after the game ends. Can be prevented.

The management device of configuration 4 that is the management device in the first embodiment and the second embodiment described above is the management device described in configuration 2,
The game history update means is specified by the authentication means from the password registered in association with the player identification information (terminal identification information) of the player who has made the update request, and information included in the update request. If the player who made the update request is authenticated by satisfying a specific condition, the player identification information (terminal identification information) of the player who made the update request is not included. Of the game histories stored in association with the game history storage means (player database), only a specific type of game history is updated based on the new game history specified from the information included in the update request. It is characterized by.

  According to this feature, even if the player enters the password incorrectly, the game history can be updated as long as the error is within a range that satisfies a specific condition. While it is possible to prevent the history from being wasted, there is an effect on the game history at the end of the game depending on the game history that has a problem in continuity due to the input of an incorrect password, that is, the content specified from the password. Since a certain game history will not be updated, a game history with such a continuity problem will be updated by mistake, resulting in a conflict between the previous game history and the game history after the game ends. Can be prevented.

The gaming system of configuration 5 which is the gaming system 1001 in the first embodiment and the second embodiment described above is the gaming system described in configuration 1 or configuration 3,
The management device is specified by the authentication means from the password registered in association with the player identification information (terminal identification information) of the player who made the update request and the information included in the update request. If the password does not match, but a specific condition is satisfied, the password is not matched but a notification means for notifying that the game history has been updated is provided.

  According to this feature, by notifying the player that the passwords did not match, it is possible to recognize that the player missed the password but the game history was successfully updated. .

The management device of configuration 6 that is the management device in the first embodiment and the second embodiment described above is the management device described in configuration 2 or configuration 4,
The password registered in association with the player identification information (terminal identification information) of the player who made the update request by the authentication means matches the password specified from the information included in the update request. However, when a specific condition is satisfied, a notification means for notifying that the password does not match but the game history is updated is provided.

  According to this feature, by notifying the player that the passwords did not match, it is possible to recognize that the player missed the password but the game history was successfully updated. .

The gaming system of configuration 7, which is the gaming system 1001 in the first embodiment and the second embodiment described above,
A gaming machine (slot machine 1) capable of performing a predetermined game;
A management device (management server 1200) for managing a game history that is a result of a player playing a game on the gaming machine;
In a gaming system consisting of
The management device (management server 1200)
A game history storage means (player database) for storing a player's game history in association with player identification information (terminal identification information) capable of identifying the player;
An issue request acceptance means for accepting a password issue request;
A password issuing means for issuing a password when receiving the issue request;
Password distribution means for distributing the password issued by the password issuing means to the player who made the issue request;
A password registration means for registering the password issued by the password issuing means in association with the player identification information of the player who made the issue request when distributing the password in accordance with the issue request;
With
The gaming machine (slot machine 1)
Password input means for inputting the password (stop switch 8L, 8C, 8R, MAXBET switch 6, password input screen),
Game history information generating means for generating game history information (two-dimensional code) capable of specifying a new game history as a result of a player who has entered a password by the password input means playing a game on the gaming machine;
Game history information output means for outputting the game history information generated by the game history information generation means;
With
The game history information generating means generates the game history information (two-dimensional code) including information capable of specifying the password input by the password input means,
The management device (management server 1200)
An update request receiving means for receiving an update request including information that can specify a game history and a password specified from the game history information (two-dimensional code);
When the update request is received, a password registered in association with the player identification information (terminal identification information) of the player who made the update request, and a password specified from the information included in the update request And authentication means for authenticating the player who made the update request based on
On the condition that the authentication means has authenticated, the game history stored in the game history storage means (player database) in association with the player identification information (terminal identification information) of the player who made the update request Game history update means for updating the game history based on the new game history specified from the information included in the update request,
Further comprising
The password issuing means, when receiving the issue request, issues a password different from the password issued when the previous issue request is received,
The authenticating means authenticates the player who made the update request on condition that the password issued this time and the password issued last time do not match.

  According to this feature, by issuing a password issuance request, the password is acquired and input when the game is started, and at the end of the game, the game history information is acquired and an update request is made to obtain a new game history. In addition to updating, when the management device receives an update request, a password registered corresponding to the corresponding player identification information, that is, a password acquired by the player at the time of issuance, and a password included in the game history information, , The game history corresponding to the corresponding player identification information is updated based on the game history specified from the game history information. For this reason, a player inputs a simple password at the start of the game without acquiring a complicated ID, etc., acquires game history information at the end of the game, and accumulates the game history only by accessing the management device In addition, the game history is not updated unless the management device is authenticated based on the password issued from the management device and the password specified from the game history information. Spoofing can also be prevented.

  In addition, when issuing an issuance request, a password that is different from the password issued when the previous issuance request was issued is issued, so the same password is not issued continuously, but the same password is issued continuously. In such a case, since the management device cannot be authenticated, it is possible to prevent the game history from being updated using the game history information that can specify the same password without playing the game.

The management device of configuration 8 that is the management device in the first embodiment and the second embodiment described above is as follows.
A management device (management server 1200) for managing a game history that is a result of a player playing a game on a gaming machine (slot machine 1),
A game history storage means (player database) for storing a player's game history in association with player identification information (terminal identification information) capable of identifying the player;
An issue request acceptance means for accepting a password issue request;
A password issuing means for issuing a password when receiving the issue request;
Password distribution means for distributing the password issued by the password issuing means to the player who made the issue request;
A password registration means for registering the password issued by the password issuing means in association with the player identification information of the player who made the issue request when distributing the password in accordance with the issue request;
Update request receiving means for receiving an update request including the password and game history specified from the game history information (two-dimensional code) output from the gaming machine and capable of specifying the password and game history;
When the update request is received, a password registered in association with the player identification information (terminal identification information) of the player who made the update request, and a password specified from the information included in the update request And authentication means for authenticating the player who made the update request based on
On the condition that the authentication means has authenticated, the game history stored in the game history storage means (player database) in association with the player identification information (terminal identification information) of the player who made the update request Game history update means for updating the game history based on the new game history specified from the information included in the update request,
With
The password issuing means, when receiving the issue request, issues a password different from the password issued when the previous issue request is received,
The authenticating means authenticates the player who made the update request on condition that the password issued this time and the password issued last time do not match.

  According to this feature, by issuing a password issuance request, the password is acquired and input when the game is started, and at the end of the game, the game history information is acquired and an update request is made to obtain a new game history. Based on the password registered corresponding to the corresponding player identification information, that is, the password acquired by the player at the time of issuance and the password included in the game history information by receiving the update request Only when authentication is performed, the game history corresponding to the corresponding player identification information is updated based on the game history specified from the game history information. For this reason, a player inputs a simple password at the start of the game without acquiring a complicated ID, etc., acquires game history information at the end of the game, and accumulates the game history only by accessing the management device In addition, the game history is not updated unless the management device is authenticated based on the password issued from the management device and the password specified from the game history information. Spoofing can also be prevented.

  In addition, when issuing an issuance request, a password that is different from the password issued when the previous issuance request was issued is issued, so the same password is not issued continuously, but the same password is issued continuously. In such a case, since the management device cannot be authenticated, it is possible to prevent the game history from being updated using the game history information that can specify the same password without playing the game.

The gaming system of configuration 9 which is the gaming system 1001 in the first embodiment and the second embodiment described above is as follows.
A gaming machine (slot machine 1) capable of performing a predetermined game;
A management device (management server 1200) for managing a game history that is a result of a player playing a game on the gaming machine;
In a gaming system consisting of
The management device (management server 1200)
A game history storage means (player database) for storing a player's game history in association with player identification information (terminal identification information) capable of identifying the player;
An issue request acceptance means for accepting a password issue request;
A password issuing means for issuing a password when receiving the issue request;
Password distribution means for distributing the password issued by the password issuing means to the player who made the issue request;
A password registration means for registering the password issued by the password issuing means in association with the player identification information of the player who made the issue request when distributing the password in accordance with the issue request;
With
The gaming machine (slot machine 1)
Password input means for inputting the password (stop switch 8L, 8C, 8R, MAXBET switch 6, password input screen),
Game history information generating means for generating game history information (two-dimensional code) capable of specifying a new game history as a result of a player who has entered a password by the password input means playing a game on the gaming machine;
Game history information output means for outputting the game history information generated by the game history information generation means;
With
The game history information generating means generates the game history information (two-dimensional code) including information capable of specifying the password input by the password input means,
The management device (management server 1200)
An update request receiving means for receiving an update request including information that can specify a game history and a password specified from the game history information (two-dimensional code);
When the update request is received, a password registered in association with the player identification information (terminal identification information) of the player who made the update request, and a password specified from the information included in the update request And authentication means for authenticating the player who made the update request based on
On the condition that the authentication means has authenticated, the game history stored in the game history storage means (player database) in association with the player identification information (terminal identification information) of the player who made the update request Game history update means for updating the game history based on the new game history specified from the information included in the update request,
Further comprising
The password issuing means issues a password using a random number when the issue request is accepted,
The authentication means authenticates the player who made the update request on condition that the password included in the update request received this time and the password included in the update request received last time do not match. .

  According to this feature, by issuing a password issuance request, the password is acquired and input when the game is started, and at the end of the game, the game history information is acquired and an update request is made to obtain a new game history. In addition to updating, when the management device receives an update request, a password registered corresponding to the corresponding player identification information, that is, a password acquired by the player at the time of issuance, and a password included in the game history information, , The game history corresponding to the corresponding player identification information is updated based on the game history specified from the game history information. For this reason, a player inputs a simple password at the start of the game without acquiring a complicated ID, etc., acquires game history information at the end of the game, and accumulates the game history only by accessing the management device In addition, the game history is not updated unless the management device is authenticated based on the password issued from the management device and the password specified from the game history information. Spoofing can also be prevented.

  In addition, when a management device receives an issue request, a password is issued using a random number, so that it is less likely that the same password as the password issued when the previous issue request was received will be issued continuously. If the same password is issued continuously, the management device cannot be authenticated, so the game history is updated using the game history information that can identify the same password without playing the game. Can be prevented.

The management apparatus of configuration 10 that is the management apparatus in the first embodiment and the second embodiment described above is as follows.
A management device (management server 1200) for managing a game history that is a result of a player playing a game on a gaming machine (slot machine 1),
A game history storage means (player database) for storing a player's game history in association with player identification information (terminal identification information) capable of identifying the player;
An issue request acceptance means for accepting a password issue request;
A password issuing means for issuing a password when receiving the issue request;
Password distribution means for distributing the password issued by the password issuing means to the player who made the issue request;
A password registration means for registering the password issued by the password issuing means in association with the player identification information of the player who made the issue request when distributing the password in accordance with the issue request;
Update request receiving means for receiving an update request including the password and game history specified from the game history information (two-dimensional code) output from the gaming machine and capable of specifying the password and game history;
When the update request is received, a password registered in association with the player identification information (terminal identification information) of the player who made the update request, and a password specified from the information included in the update request And authentication means for authenticating the player who made the update request based on
On the condition that the authentication means has authenticated, the game history stored in the game history storage means (player database) in association with the player identification information (terminal identification information) of the player who made the update request Game history update means for updating the game history based on the new game history specified from the information included in the update request,
With
The password issuing means issues a password using a random number when the issue request is accepted,
The authentication means authenticates the player who made the update request on condition that the password included in the update request received this time and the password included in the update request received last time do not match. .

  According to this feature, by issuing a password issuance request, the password is acquired and input when the game is started, and at the end of the game, the game history information is acquired and an update request is made to obtain a new game history. Based on the password registered corresponding to the corresponding player identification information, that is, the password acquired by the player at the time of issuance and the password included in the game history information by receiving the update request Only when authentication is performed, the game history corresponding to the corresponding player identification information is updated based on the game history specified from the game history information. For this reason, a player inputs a simple password at the start of the game without acquiring a complicated ID, etc., acquires game history information at the end of the game, and accumulates the game history only by accessing the management device In addition, the game history is not updated unless the management device is authenticated based on the password issued from the management device and the password specified from the game history information. Spoofing can also be prevented.

  In addition, a password is issued using a random number when an issuance request is received, and it is less likely that the same password as the password issued at the previous issuance request will be issued continuously. If the same password is issued continuously, the management device cannot be authenticated, so that the game history is updated using the game history information that can identify the same password without playing the game. Can be prevented.

The gaming system of configuration 11 that is the gaming system 1001 in the first embodiment and the second embodiment described above is as follows.
A gaming machine (slot machine 1) capable of performing a predetermined game;
A management device (management server 1200) for managing a game history that is a result of a player playing a game on the gaming machine;
In a gaming system consisting of
The management device (management server 1200)
A game history storage means (player database) for storing a player's game history in association with player identification information (terminal identification information) capable of identifying the player;
An issue request acceptance means for accepting a password issue request;
A password issuing means for issuing a password when receiving the issue request;
Password distribution means for distributing the password issued by the password issuing means to the player who made the issue request;
A password registration means for registering the password issued by the password issuing means in association with the player identification information of the player who made the issue request when distributing the password in accordance with the issue request;
With
The gaming machine (slot machine 1)
Password input means for inputting the password (stop switch 8L, 8C, 8R, MAXBET switch 6, password input screen),
Game history information generating means for generating game history information (two-dimensional code) capable of specifying a new game history as a result of a player who has entered a password by the password input means playing a game on the gaming machine;
Game history information output means for outputting the game history information generated by the game history information generation means;
With
The game history information generating means includes the game history information (two-dimensional Code)
The management device (management server 1200)
An update request receiving means for receiving an update request including information that can specify a game history, a password, and a random number specified from the game history information (two-dimensional code);
When the update request is received, a password registered in association with the player identification information (terminal identification information) of the player who made the update request, and a password specified from the information included in the update request And authentication means for authenticating the player who made the update request based on
On the condition that the authentication means has authenticated, the game history stored in the game history storage means (player database) in association with the player identification information (terminal identification information) of the player who made the update request Game history update means for updating the game history based on the new game history specified from the information included in the update request,
Further comprising
The authentication means authenticates the player who made the update request on condition that the password and random number included in the update request received this time do not match the password and random number included in the update request received in the past. It is characterized by that.

  According to this feature, by issuing a password issuance request, the password is acquired and input when the game is started, and at the end of the game, the game history information is acquired and an update request is made to obtain a new game history. In addition to updating, when the management device receives an update request, a password registered corresponding to the corresponding player identification information, that is, a password acquired by the player at the time of issuance, and a password included in the game history information, , The game history corresponding to the corresponding player identification information is updated based on the game history specified from the game history information. For this reason, a player inputs a simple password at the start of the game without acquiring a complicated ID, etc., acquires game history information at the end of the game, and accumulates the game history only by accessing the management device In addition, the game history is not updated unless the management device is authenticated based on the password issued from the management device and the password specified from the game history information. Spoofing can also be prevented.

  In addition to the password, the game history information includes a random number acquired from the input of the password to the generation of the game history information, and the game history information for specifying the same password and random number combination is generated. If the update request including the game history information specifying the same password and random number combination is accepted in the past, the management device cannot be authenticated and the game is performed. Thus, it is possible to prevent the game history from being updated using the game history information that can identify the same password.

The management device of configuration 12 that is the management device in the first embodiment and the second embodiment described above is
A management device (management server 1200) for managing a game history that is a result of a player playing a game on a gaming machine (slot machine 1),
A game history storage means (player database) for storing a player's game history in association with player identification information (terminal identification information) capable of identifying the player;
An issue request acceptance means for accepting a password issue request;
A password issuing means for issuing a password when receiving the issue request;
Password distribution means for distributing the password issued by the password issuing means to the player who made the issue request;
A password registration means for registering the password issued by the password issuing means in association with the player identification information of the player who made the issue request when distributing the password in accordance with the issue request;
An update request including the password, game history, and random number that is specified from the game history information (two-dimensional code) that can be specified from the password, the game history, and the random number acquired by the gaming machine, output from the gaming machine. An update request receiving means for receiving;
When the update request is received, a password registered in association with the player identification information (terminal identification information) of the player who made the update request, and a password specified from the information included in the update request And authentication means for authenticating the player who made the update request based on
On the condition that the authentication means has authenticated, the game history stored in the game history storage means (player database) in association with the player identification information (terminal identification information) of the player who made the update request Game history update means for updating the game history based on the new game history specified from the information included in the update request,
With
The authentication means authenticates the player who made the update request on condition that the password and random number included in the update request received this time do not match the password and random number included in the update request received in the past. It is characterized by that.

  According to this feature, by issuing a password issuance request, the password is acquired and input when the game is started, and at the end of the game, the game history information is acquired and an update request is made to obtain a new game history. Based on the password registered corresponding to the corresponding player identification information, that is, the password acquired by the player at the time of issuance and the password included in the game history information by receiving the update request Only when authentication is performed, the game history corresponding to the corresponding player identification information is updated based on the game history specified from the game history information. For this reason, a player inputs a simple password at the start of the game without acquiring a complicated ID, etc., acquires game history information at the end of the game, and accumulates the game history only by accessing the management device In addition, the game history is not updated unless the management device is authenticated based on the password issued from the management device and the password specified from the game history information. Spoofing can also be prevented.

  In addition, the game history information includes a random number acquired by the gaming machine in addition to the password, and the possibility that game history information specifying the same password and random number combination is generated is reduced. If an update request including game history information specifying the same password and random number combination has been received in the past, the authentication of the management device cannot be received, so that the same password can be specified without playing the game. It is possible to prevent the game history from being updated using the history information.

  The update requests received in the past in configurations 11 and 12 may be update requests received last time, update requests received before the previous time, update requests received within a certain period, or the like.

The gaming machine of configuration 13 which is the gaming machine in the first embodiment and the second embodiment described above is
A gaming machine (slot machine 1) capable of performing a predetermined game,
The first is to input a password issued by a management device (management server 1200) that manages a game history (mission achievement rate, number of games, number of BBs, number of RBs, etc.) that is a result of a player playing a game. 1 information input means (stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R, MAXBET switch 6, password input screen),
Game history information generating means for generating game history information (two-dimensional code) capable of specifying a new game history as a result of a player who has entered a password by the password input means playing a game on the gaming machine;
Game history information output means for outputting the game history information generated by the game history information generation means;
With
The game history information generating means includes the game history information (two-dimensional) including the password input by the password input means and information that can identify a random number acquired between the input of the password and the generation of the game history information. Code).

  According to this feature, by issuing a password issuance request, the password is acquired and input when the game is started, and at the end of the game, the game history information is acquired and an update request is made to obtain a new game history. In addition to updating, when the management device receives an update request, it becomes possible to perform authentication based on the password acquired by the player at the time of issuance and the password included in the game history information, and only when authenticated The game history of the corresponding player can be updated based on the game history specified from the game history information. For this reason, a player inputs a simple password at the start of the game without acquiring a complicated ID, etc., acquires game history information at the end of the game, and accumulates the game history only by accessing the management device In addition, the game history is not updated unless the management device is authenticated based on the password issued from the management device and the password specified from the game history information. Spoofing can also be prevented.

  In addition to the password, the game history information includes a random number acquired from the input of the password to the generation of the game history information, and the game history information for specifying the same password and random number combination is generated. If the update request including the game history information that specifies the combination of the same password and random number is received in the past, the management device authentication is not accepted and the game is not performed. It is possible to prevent the game history from being updated using the game history information that can identify the same password.

  In the configurations 1 to 13, the password input means may be configured such that the player can directly input the password, or may be configured such that the password can be input by reading it from a bar code or a two-dimensional code.

  In addition, in the configurations 1 to 13, the game history information output means may be configured to output the game history information by displaying character data, or display data encoded such as a barcode or a two-dimensional code. The game history information may be output by a wired connection, a wireless connection, an infrared connection, or the like so that the game history information can be output from the outside.

  In the configurations 1 to 13, the password and the game history information may use the same format data, or may use different format data for both.

[Third Embodiment]
In the third embodiment, display of a game history on the portable terminal 1100 in the gaming system 1001 in the first embodiment and the second embodiment described above will be described.

  FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing the flow of the game history display response process executed by the management server in the third embodiment. This process is a process for responding to a request from a web browser executed on the mobile terminal 1100 regarding the game history.

  FIG. 41 is a first diagram illustrating transition of screens displayed on the mobile terminal 1100 according to the third embodiment. 41A and 41B, the two-dimensional code that is controlled by control unit 110 of portable terminal 1100 and read by camera unit 190 is executed by control unit 110 of portable terminal 1100. A history update URL for updating the game history, which is analyzed by an application program for analyzing the two-dimensional code and includes a parameter capable of specifying the game history, is displayed on the display unit 140 of the mobile terminal 1100.

  The player confirms the history update URL displayed on the display unit 140 and selects the history update URL, so that the portable terminal 1100 executes the web browser, thereby managing the management indicated by the history update URL. Access the server 1200.

  As a result, the end-time registration request, update request, or simple update request described with reference to FIGS. 25 and 26 of the first embodiment is transmitted from the portable terminal 1100 to the management server 1200. And the control part 210 of the management server 1200 performs a log | history display process in step S227, step S248, or step S258, respectively, after performing a predetermined | prescribed process. The history display process will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 38 is a flowchart illustrating a flow of history display processing executed by the management server 1200 according to the third embodiment. 38, in step S151, control unit 210 of management server 1200 transmits a digest confirmation display screen for confirming whether or not to display a game history digest to requesting mobile terminal 1100. .

  Hereinafter, when the management server 1200 transmits a screen (or display) to the mobile terminal 1100, the management server 1200 transmits data for displaying the screen to the mobile terminal 1100, and the mobile terminal 1100 executes a web browser. The display of the screen based on the data.

  Referring to FIG. 41 (C), a sentence confirming whether or not to display a game history digest in addition to the game history on the digest confirmation display screen displayed on display unit 140 of portable terminal 1100, A “Yes” link for selecting that display is desired and a “No” link for selecting that display is not desired are displayed.

  Returning to FIG. 38, in step S152, the control unit 210 determines whether or not the “Yes” link is selected on the screen of FIG. If it is determined that the “yes” link is not selected (NO in step S152), control unit 210 advances the process to be executed to step S154.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the “Yes” link has been selected (YES in step S152), in step S153, the control unit 210 displays a digest display of the current game history of the user as a request source mobile phone. Transmit to terminal 1100. The digest display template is stored in advance in the storage unit 220 of the management server 1200. This template is customized and transmitted according to the user's game history.

  Referring to FIGS. 41D and 41E, the digest screen displays the main contents of the game history as a digest. For example, the character and the character speak the main contents of the game history. Is displayed.

  Thus, a special effect such as a digest display is determined based on the current game history or the accumulated game history being managed. Such a game history includes the total number of games, the number of BBs, the number of RBs, the level, the story, the effect setting, the achievement mission, and the like as shown in FIG. In addition, the special effects are determined based on the game history of specific items such as the number of humiliations, the number of BBs, and the appearance history of the premier effects derived from these game histories.

  In addition, when displaying a digest of 5 frames, priority is given to specific items derived from the game history, and five specific items from specific items with high priority are displayed corresponding to each frame. Also good.

  The data for performing a special effect such as a digest display on the portable terminal 1100 is provided on the condition that information indicating a selection result indicating that the special effect on the screen of FIG. 1100 is transmitted.

  Returning to FIG. 38, after step S153, in step S154, the control unit 210 transmits the character display of the current game history of the user to the requesting mobile terminal 1100.

  Referring to FIG. 41 (F), the game history character display screen displays the current game history and the accumulated game history of the user, and their main items.

  Returning to FIG. 38, after step S154, in step S155, the control unit 210 displays a memo input confirmation screen for confirming whether or not the player inputs a memo relating to the current game history. Transmit to terminal 1100. Such a memo is player information added by the player to the game history.

  FIG. 42 is a second diagram illustrating a transition of screens displayed on the mobile terminal 1100 according to the third embodiment. Referring to FIG. 42 (A), on the memo input confirmation screen, a text confirming whether or not to input a memo, a “Yes” link for selecting a memo input, a memo A “No” link is displayed to select that you do not wish to enter.

  Returning to FIG. 38, in step S156, the control unit 210 determines whether or not the “Yes” link has been selected on the screen of FIG. If it is determined that the “yes” link is not selected (NO in step S156), control unit 210 returns the process to be executed to the caller process of this history display process.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the “yes” link has been selected (YES in step S156), in step S157, the control unit 210 displays the memo input screen for the current game history of the user as the request source. It transmits to the portable terminal 1100.

  Referring to FIG. 42 (B), the memo input screen includes an input field for inputting each of the store name of the game hall, the machine number of the gaming machine, the investment amount, the recovered amount, and the comment, and the contents of these memos A “Yes” link for selecting that the user wishes to disclose to another person and a “No” link for selecting that the user does not wish to be displayed are displayed. By operating any one of the links, the inputted memo content is transmitted to the management server 1200.

  The content to be entered as a comment may be a notice rule or occultism noticed by the player, an evaluation of a game machine or a gaming machine that has played a game, or a slot machine setting. It may be an expectation.

  Returning to FIG. 38, in step S <b> 161, control unit 210 determines whether or not the content of the memo has been received from portable terminal 1100. If it is determined that no data has been received (NO in step S161), control unit 210 repeats the process in step S161.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the content of the memo has been received (when YES is determined in step S161), in step S162, the control unit 210 associates the received content of the memo with the terminal identification information and stores the storage unit 220. Remember me.

  Also, when it is determined in step S163 that the link to “open” the memo to others has been selected is received together with the contents of the memo (when YES is determined in step S163), the control unit 210 The process to be executed is advanced to the process of step S171.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the link indicating that the memo is not published to others has been selected (NO in step S163), in step S164, the control unit 210 determines that the current game history And it is judged whether specific data is contained in the accumulated game history. The specific data is data that can receive attention from other players, such as data in which the numerical value of any item in the game history is a doublet, and data indicating that a premier effect has been performed.

  If it is determined that specific data is not included (NO in step S164), control unit 210 returns the process to be executed to the caller process of this history display process.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that specific data is included in the game history (when YES is determined in step S164), in step S165, the control unit 210 currently discloses the specific data to others. It is determined whether it is set as follows. If it is determined that it is set as private (NO in step S165), control unit 210 returns the process to be executed to the caller process of this history display process.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the specific data is not private (when YES is determined in step S165), in step S166, the control unit 210 requests a public recommendation screen for recommending the user to disclose the specific data. Transmit to the original mobile terminal 1100.

  Referring to FIG. 42 (C), on the recommendation screen, the content of the specific data, the text recommending the release to others, the “Yes” link for selecting the release, and Then, a “No” link is displayed for selecting that the user does not wish to be released.

  Returning to FIG. 38, in step S167, the control unit 210 determines whether or not the “Yes” link is selected on the screen of FIG. If it is determined that the “yes” link is not selected (NO in step S167), control unit 210 returns the process to be executed to the caller process of this history display process. On the other hand, if it is determined that the “yes” link has been selected (YES in step S167), the process to be executed is advanced to the process in step S171.

  In step S <b> 171, the control unit 210 transmits a public setting screen for setting public information such as a game history to the requesting mobile terminal 1100.

  Referring to FIG. 42 (D), on the public setting screen, it is permitted to disclose each item of the text that prompts the user to set whether or not to permit the public, the history display of the game history, and the memo. The “permitted” link, the “not permitted” link indicating that the disclosure is not permitted, and the “determined” link indicating that the setting is determined and the process is terminated are displayed. When the “decision” link is operated, the setting content of the public setting such as a game history is transmitted from the portable terminal 1100 to the management server 1200.

  Returning to FIG. 38, in step S <b> 172, control unit 210 determines whether or not the setting content of the public setting has been received from portable terminal 1100. If it is determined that it has not been received (NO in step S172), control unit 210 repeats the process of step S172.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the setting content of the public setting has been received (when YES is determined in step S172), in step S173, the control unit 210 changes the received setting content of the public setting such as the game history to the terminal identification information. Are stored in the storage unit 220 in association with each other. Next, in step S174, the control unit 210 transmits a menu screen of the user's game history to the requesting mobile terminal 1100. Thereafter, the control unit 210 returns the process to be executed to the caller process of the history display process.

  FIG. 43 is a third diagram illustrating a transition of screens displayed on portable terminal 1100 according to the third embodiment. Referring to FIG. 43 (A), on the game history menu screen of Mr. A, a link of “1. history display” for displaying the history display of the game history, and a memo display of the game history are displayed. "2. Memo display" link, "3. New memo creation" link for creating a new game history memo display, "4. Memo setting" link for setting the game history, etc., and Then, a link of “5. bulletin board” for displaying the bulletin board of the community of the game history site is displayed.

  The player can display the menu screen by accessing this URL from the next time by storing the URL of the menu screen of the game history in a favorite or the like of the portable terminal 1100. Since this menu screen is a screen for each player, the URL of the menu screen is also different for each player.

  Referring to FIG. 37, in step S111, control unit 210 of management server 1200 determines whether or not any of the URLs of the game history menu screen has been accessed. If it is determined that there is no access (NO in step S111), control unit 210 advances the process to be performed to the process in step S114.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that any of the URLs on the game history menu screen has been accessed (when YES is determined in step S111), in step S112, the control unit 210 determines the user specified by the URL and the request source. It is determined whether or not the user indicated by the terminal identification information of the mobile terminal is the same.

  When it is determined that they are not the same (when NO is determined in step S112), for example, when the URL taught by another player is input to the mobile terminal, the control unit 210 displays the menu. The process to be executed is advanced to the process of step S114 without transmitting the screen to the mobile terminal.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the user specified by the URL and the user indicated by the terminal identification information of the requesting mobile terminal are the same (when YES is determined in step S112), in step S113, the control unit 210 The user's menu screen is transmitted to the mobile terminal 1100 of the requesting user. This menu screen is the screen described with reference to FIG.

  Next, in step S114, control unit 210 determines whether or not the “1. history display” link is selected on the menu screen. If it is determined that the link is not selected (NO in step S114), control unit 210 advances the process to be executed to step S116. On the other hand, if it is determined that the link has been selected (YES in step S114), in step S115, the control unit 210 executes history redisplay processing.

  FIG. 39 is a flowchart illustrating the flow of history redisplay processing executed by the management server 1200 according to the third embodiment. Referring to FIG. 39, in step S181, control unit 210 of management server 1200 transmits a history display date selection screen for selecting a date for displaying the game history of the user to requesting mobile terminal 1100. .

  Referring to FIG. 43 (B), a link for selecting a date on which the game history of Mr. A who is the user is stored is displayed on the history display date selection screen.

  Returning to FIG. 39, in step S182, control unit 210 determines whether or not the date selected on the history display date selection screen has been received. If it is determined that it has not been received (NO in step S182), control unit 210 repeats the process in step S182.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the date has been received (when YES is determined in step S182), in step S183, the control unit 210 displays a digest confirmation display screen for confirming the display of the digest of the specified date of the user. It transmits to the requesting mobile terminal 1100.

  Referring to FIG. 43C, on the digest confirmation display screen displayed on the display unit 140 of the portable terminal 1100, whether the game history digest is displayed in addition to the user name, the selected date, and the game history. A text for confirming whether or not to be displayed, a “Yes” link for selecting that display is desired, and a “No” link for selecting that display is not desired are displayed.

  Returning to FIG. 39, in step S184, the control unit 210 determines whether or not the “Yes” link is selected on the screen of FIG. If it is determined that the “yes” link has not been selected (NO in step S184), control unit 210 advances the process to be executed to step S186.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the “yes” link has been selected (YES in step S184), in step S185, the control unit 210 displays a digest display of the game history of the user's designated date. It transmits to the portable terminal 1100. This digest display is a screen similar to the screen described in FIG. 41 (D) and FIG. 41 (E).

  In the next step S186, the control unit 210 transmits the character display of the game history of the specified date of the user to the requesting mobile terminal 1100. The character display of this game history is a screen similar to the screen described in FIG.

  Next, in step S187, the control unit 210 transmits a menu screen of the user's game history to the requesting mobile terminal 1100. Thereafter, the control unit 210 returns the process to be executed to the caller process of the history redisplay process.

  Referring back to FIG. 37, in step S116, the control unit 210 selects the “2. Memo display” link on the menu screen, and selects the memo display date to be displayed next. It is determined whether or not a date has been selected on the display date selection screen.

  Referring to FIG. 43D, on the memo display date selection screen, a link for selecting the date on which the memo display of the user A is stored is displayed.

  Returning to FIG. 37, when it is determined that “2. Memo display” and date have not been selected (NO in step S116), control unit 210 advances the process to be executed to step S121.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that “2. Memo display” and a date have been selected (YES in step S116), in step S117, control unit 210 displays a memo display screen of the user-specified date as a request source. To the portable terminal 1100.

  Referring to FIG. 43E, the memo display screen displays “user name, description indicating that the memo is of the selected date, memo contents, and“ desired to add / modify memo ”. A “note correction” link and a “next memo” link for selecting that the next memo is to be displayed are displayed.

  When the “Memo addition / modification” link is selected, the player can additionally modify the memo on a screen similar to the screen described in FIG. When the “next memo” link is selected, a memo display screen similar to that shown in FIG. 43E for the next date is displayed.

  Returning to FIG. 37, in step S121, the control unit 210 determines whether or not the link “3. Create new memo” is selected on the menu screen. If it is determined that the link has not been selected (NO in step S121), control unit 210 advances the process to be executed to step S125.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the link has been selected (YES in step S121), in step S122, the control unit 210 displays a memo input screen for inputting a memo of the user's game history so far. To the requesting mobile terminal 1100.

  Referring to FIG. 43 (F), this memo input screen is the same as the memo input screen described with reference to FIG. 42 (B), and therefore, repeated description will not be repeated.

  Returning to FIG. 37, the processing in step S123 and step S124 is the same as the processing in step S161 and step S162 in FIG. 38 described above, and therefore, redundant description will not be repeated.

  In step S125, the control unit 210 determines whether or not the link “4. Public setting” has been selected on the menu screen. If it is determined that the link has not been selected (NO in step S125), control unit 210 advances the process to be executed to step S131.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the link has been selected (YES in step S125), in step S126, control unit 210 sets a public setting screen for setting the game history and the like of the user so far. Is transmitted to the requesting mobile terminal 1100.

  Referring to FIG. 43G, this disclosure setting screen is a simplified version of the memo input screen described in FIG. Specifically, in the screen of FIG. 42D, the items to be disclosed in the memo display can be set in detail. However, in the screen of FIG. 43G, the permission for publishing is set collectively for the memo display. It has become.

  Returning to FIG. 37, in step S <b> 127, control unit 210 determines whether or not the setting content of the public setting has been received from portable terminal 1100. If it is determined that it has not been received (NO in step S127), control unit 210 repeats the process in step S127.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the setting content of the public setting has been received (when YES is determined in step S127), in step S128, the control unit 210 performs a game according to the received setting content of the public setting such as a game history. The public setting such as history is changed, and the changed setting is stored in the storage unit 220 in association with the terminal identification information.

  In step S131, control unit 210 determines whether or not the link “5. bulletin board” is selected on the menu screen. If it is determined that the link has not been selected (NO in step S131), control unit 210 advances the process to be executed to step S133.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the link has been selected (YES in step S131), in step S132, control unit 210 transmits a bulletin board screen to requesting mobile terminal 1100.

  FIG. 44 is a fourth diagram illustrating a transition of screens displayed on the mobile terminal 1100 according to the third embodiment. The menu screen of FIG. 43 (A) is Mr. A's screen, while the menu screen of FIG. 44 (A) is Mr. B's screen.

  When Mr. B selects the link “5. Bulletin board” on the screen of FIG. 44A, the bulletin board screen of FIG. 44B is displayed. Referring to FIG. 44B, the latest bulletin board is first displayed on this bulletin board screen. The bulletin board screen also displays a “next bulletin” link for displaying the next bulletin.

  This notice includes a message that Mr. A has released the game information at a certain date and time, and a “Select this link!” Link for accessing the released information. Such posting is automatically posted on the bulletin board in response to Mr. A setting the game history or the like to be public.

  Returning to FIG. 37, in step S133, the control unit 210 of the management server 1200 determines whether or not the URL linked to the public information described on the bulletin board has been accessed. If it is determined that there is no access (NO in step S133), control unit 210 advances the process to be executed to the process in step S141.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the URL linked to the public information has been accessed (YES in step S133), in step S134, the control unit 210 displays a menu screen of the user's public information specified by the URL. To the mobile terminal 1100 of the requesting user.

  Referring to FIG. 44C, a link of “1. history display” for displaying a history display of Mr. A's game history on the menu screen of the public information of Mr. A who is the user specified by the URL. , "2. Memo display" link to display the memo display of Mr. A's game history (cannot be selected because it is set to private here, and a strikethrough is attached to indicate that .), And a text stating that the information with a strikethrough is not disclosed.

  Returning to FIG. 37, in step S <b> 141, control unit 210 determines whether or not the “1. history display” link has been selected on the menu screen of a certain user's public information. If it is determined that the link is not selected (NO in step S141), control unit 210 advances the process to be executed to step S143. On the other hand, if it is determined that the link has been selected (YES in step S141), in step S142, the control unit 210 executes another person history display processing.

  FIG. 40 is a flowchart illustrating the flow of the other person history display process executed by the management server 1200 according to the third embodiment. Referring to FIG. 40, in step S191, control unit 210 of management server 1200 transmits a history display date selection screen for selecting a date for displaying the game history of the designated user to requesting mobile terminal 1100. . This history display date selection screen is the same screen as the screen described in FIG.

  Next, in step S192, control unit 210 determines whether or not the date selected on the history display date selection screen has been received. If it is determined that it has not been received (NO in step S192), control unit 210 repeats the process in step S192.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the date has been received (YES in step S192), in step S193, the control unit 210 displays a digest confirmation display screen for confirming the display of the digest of the specified date of the specified user. It transmits to the requesting mobile terminal 1100. This digest confirmation display screen is the same screen as the screen described in FIG.

  Next, in step S194, the control unit 210 determines whether or not the “Yes” link is selected on the digest confirmation display screen. If it is determined that the “yes” link has not been selected (NO in step S194), control unit 210 advances the process to be executed to step S196.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the “yes” link has been selected (YES in step S194), in step S195, the control unit 210 displays a digest display of the game history on the specified date of the specified user. It transmits to the portable terminal 1100. This digest display is a screen similar to the screen described in FIG. 41 (D) and FIG. 41 (E).

  In the next step S196, the control unit 210 transmits the character display of the game history of the designated date of the designated user to the requesting mobile terminal 1100. The character display of this game history is a screen similar to the screen described in FIG.

  Next, in step S197, the control unit 210 transmits a menu screen of the public information of the designated user to the requesting mobile terminal 1100. Thereafter, the control unit 210 returns the process to be executed to the process of the caller of this other person history display process.

  Returning to FIG. 37, in step S143, the control unit 210 selects the “2. Memo display” link on the menu screen of the public information of the designated user and displays the memo display date to be displayed next. In the memo display date selection screen for selecting, it is determined whether or not a date has been selected. This memo display date selection screen is the same screen as the screen described in FIG.

  If it is determined that “2. Memo display” and date have not been selected (NO in step S143), control unit 210 returns the process to be executed to the caller process of this process.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that “2. Memo display” and date have been selected (YES in step S143), in step S144, control unit 210 displays a memo display screen of the specified date of the specified user as the request source. To the portable terminal 1100. This memo display screen is the same screen as the screen described in FIG. Thereafter, the control unit 210 returns the process to be executed to the process of the caller of this process.

[Modification of Third Embodiment]
In the modification of the third embodiment, the digest display of the example of the special effect described in the third embodiment is modified.

  FIG. 45 is a diagram illustrating transition of screens displayed on the mobile terminal 1100 according to the modification of the third embodiment. 45 (A) and 45 (B) are modifications of FIG. 41 (D) and FIG. 41 (E).

  In the third embodiment, as shown in FIG. 41 (D) and FIG. 41 (E), an effect that the character speaks the main contents of the game history is performed as a special effect.

  In the modified example of the third embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 45A and 45B, as a special effect, a characteristic effect display in the schematic diagram of the liquid crystal display 51 of the slot machine 1; Characteristic appearances in the schematic diagrams of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, and a sentence to explain the situation are displayed.

  Note that the resolution of the display unit 140 of the portable terminal 1100 is generally lower than the resolution of the screen of a gaming machine such as the slot machine 1 and a pachinko gaming machine 700 described later, and thus the display unit 140 of the portable terminal 1100 The effect display and the outcome displayed on are simplified and displayed.

[Fourth Embodiment]
In the fourth embodiment, a case where the slot machine 1 in the above-described third embodiment is replaced with a pachinko gaming machine 700 will be described.

  First, an overall configuration of a pachinko gaming machine 700 that is an example of a gaming machine will be described. FIG. 46 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 700. FIG. FIG. 47 is a diagram for explaining the characteristics of hit type control including big hits and small hits in a table format.

  The pachinko gaming machine 700 includes an outer frame (not shown) formed in a vertically long rectangular shape, and a game frame attached to the inside of the outer frame so as to be opened and closed. In addition, the pachinko gaming machine 700 includes a glass door frame 702 formed in a frame shape that can be opened and closed in the game frame. The game frame includes a front frame (not shown) installed to be openable and closable with respect to the outer frame, a mechanism plate (not shown) to which mechanism parts and the like are attached, and various parts (games to be described later) attached to them. And the board 706).

  A hitting ball supply tray (upper plate) 703 is provided on the lower surface of the glass door frame 702. On the top surface of the hitting ball supply tray 703, a chance button 7111 is provided that is operated when a specific effect is executed in the variation display of the effect symbol (decoration symbol). The chance button 7111 corresponds to the effect switch 56 of the slot machine 1 described in the first embodiment. Under the hitting ball supply tray 703, there are an extra ball receiving tray 704 for storing game balls as game media that cannot be accommodated in the hitting ball supply tray 703, and a hitting operation handle (operation knob) 705 for emitting hitting balls (game balls). Is provided. A game board 706 (see FIG. 5) is detachably attached to the back surface of the glass door frame 702. The game board 706 is a structure including a plate-like body constituting the game board and various components attached to the plate-like body. In addition, a game area 707 is formed on the front surface of the game board 706 in which a game ball that has been struck can flow down. A large number of nails for guiding a game ball are implanted in the game area 707.

  In the vicinity of the center of the game area 707, an effect display device 709 composed of a liquid crystal display device (LCD) is provided. In the effect display device 709, a change display (also referred to as variable display, update display, or cyclic display) of effect symbols (decorative symbols) synchronized with the change display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is performed. The variation display of the effect symbol is executed in various variations such as scroll display and on-site switching display. The effect display device 709 corresponds to a variable display device that performs variable display of effect symbols (decorative symbols) as a plurality of types of identification information that can identify each. In the effect display device 709, an effect symbol display area for displaying an effect symbol on the display screen is provided. For example, three (plural) “left”, “middle”, and “right” are displayed in the effect symbol display area. There is a symbol display area as a display area for variably displaying the effect symbols. Each of these three effect symbols is an effect symbol as a plurality of types of identification information that can be identified. The effect display device 709 is controlled by an effect control microcomputer mounted on the effect control board. When the variation control of the first special symbol is executed by the first special symbol display unit 708a, the effect control microcomputer causes the effect display device 709 to execute the effect display along with the variation display, and the second special symbol display unit 708a executes the second special display. When the variation display of the second special symbol is executed on the symbol display 708b, the effect display is executed by the effect display device along with the variation display, so that it is possible to easily grasp the progress of the game.

  On the left side of the upper portion of the effect display device 709 in the game board 706, there is a first special symbol display (first variation display means) 708a that variably displays the first special symbols as a plurality of types of identification information that can be identified. Is provided. In this embodiment, the first special symbol display 708a is realized by a simple and small display (for example, 7 segment LED) capable of displaying numbers 0 to 9 in a variable manner. In other words, the first special symbol display 708a is configured to variably display numbers (or symbols) from 0 to 9. On the right side of the upper portion of the effect display device 709 in the game board 706, there is a second special symbol display (second variation display means) 708b that variably displays a second special symbol as a plurality of types of identification information that can be identified. Is provided. The second special symbol display 708b is realized by a simple and small display (for example, 7-segment LED) capable of displaying numbers 0 to 9 in a variable manner. In other words, the second special symbol display 708b is configured to variably display numbers (or symbols) from 0 to 9.

  In this embodiment, the type of the first special symbol and the type of the second special symbol are the same (for example, both 0 to 9), but the types may be different. Further, the first special symbol display unit 708a and the second special symbol display unit 708b may be configured to variably display, for example, a number (or a two-digit symbol) of 00 to 99, for example.

  Hereinafter, the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be collectively referred to as a special symbol, and the first special symbol indicator 708a and the second special symbol indicator 708b may be collectively referred to as a special symbol indicator. The first special symbol is subjected to the variable display on the condition that the second special symbol display unit 708b does not execute the variable display of the second special symbol. For the second special symbol, the variable display is executed on the condition that the first special symbol display unit 708a does not execute the variable display of the first special symbol. That is, either the first special symbol or the second special symbol is variably displayed without being variably displayed at the same time.

  For the variation display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the first start condition or the second start condition, which is the execution condition of the variation display, is satisfied (for example, the game ball has the first start winning opening 713 or the second start winning opening) 714), the display condition of the variable display (for example, when the number of reserved memories is not 0 and the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is not executed) The game is started based on the fact that the big hit game is not executed), and when the variable display time (variable time) elapses, the display result (stop symbol) is derived and displayed. Note that winning means that a game ball has passed through a predetermined area such as a prize opening (a game ball has entered). Deriving and displaying the display result is to finally stop and display a symbol (an example of identification information).

  In the following description, the fact that the game ball has won the first start prize opening 713 may be referred to as a first start prize, and the fact that the game ball has won the second start prize opening 714 will be referred to as a second start prize. There is a case. The data related to the variable display in which the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not satisfied is held and stored as reserved storage data that is a right to perform variable display of the special symbol until the start condition is satisfied. Specifically, the on-hold storage data is stored in a predetermined area of a RAM 755 of a game control microcomputer 7560 described later. On-hold storage data for the first start prize is stored in the first on-hold storage buffer as first on-hold storage data with a predetermined number (for example, 4) as an upper limit, and on-premise storage data for the second start prize is stored in a predetermined number (for example, 4). Is stored in the second reserved storage buffer as second reserved storage data.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 700, a ball striking device for driving a driving motor in response to a player operating a ball striking operation handle 705 and launching a game ball to the game area 707 using the rotational force of the driving motor (see FIG. Not shown). A game ball launched from the ball striking device enters the game area 707 through a ball striking rail formed in a circular shape so as to surround the game area 707, and then descends the game area 707. When the game ball enters the first start winning port 713 and is detected by the first start port switch 713a, if the variation display of the first special symbol can be started (for example, the variation display of the special symbol ends, 1), the first special symbol display unit 708a starts the variation display (variation) of the first special symbol, and the effect display device 709 starts the variation display of the effect symbol (decoration symbol). Is done. That is, the change display of the first special symbol and the effect symbol corresponds to winning in the first start winning opening 713. If the variable display of the first special symbol cannot be started, the first reserved memory number is increased by 1 on condition that the first reserved memory number has not reached the upper limit value.

  When the game ball enters the second start winning port 714 and is detected by the second start port switch 714a, if the variation display of the second special symbol can be started (for example, the variation display of the special symbol ends, 2), the second special symbol display unit 708b starts the variation display (variation) of the second special symbol, and the effect display device 709 starts the variation display of the effect symbol (decoration symbol). Is done. In other words, the variation display of the second special symbol and the effect symbol corresponds to winning in the second start winning opening 714. If the variable display of the second special symbol cannot be started, the second reserved memory number is increased by 1 on condition that the second reserved memory number has not reached the upper limit value.

  The effect display device 709 is used for decoration (effect) during the variable display time of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 708a and during the variable display time of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 708b. The effect design (decoration design) is displayed as a variation design. The change display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 708a and the change display of the effect symbol on the effect display device 709 are synchronized. Further, the variation display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 708b and the variation display of the effect symbol on the effect display device 709 are synchronized. Synchronous means that the start point and end point of variable display are substantially the same (may be exactly the same) and the period of variable display is substantially the same (may be exactly the same). In addition, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 708a and when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 708b, the effect display device 709 causes the jackpot to be recalled. The combination of is stopped and displayed. The first special symbol display device 708a, the second special symbol display device 708b, and the effect display device 709 described above are variable display devices that perform variable display of identification information and derive and display the display result, and are used as a variable display unit. It is done.

  In the effect display device 709, when the variable display is started, for example, all of the left, middle, and right effect symbols start the variable display. Then, the left, middle, and right effect symbols that are variably displayed basically stop in a predetermined order (for example, a predetermined order such as the order of the left effect symbol, the right effect symbol, and the middle effect symbol). When a predetermined variation time has elapsed from the start of variation display, all the left, middle and right effect symbols are stopped and the display result is confirmed. The order in which the left, middle, and right effect symbols stop may be other than the order of the left, right, and center symbols. Further, the left, middle, and right effect symbols may be stopped simultaneously.

  A winning device having a first start winning port 713 is provided below the effect display device 709. The game ball that has won the first start winning opening 713 is guided to the back of the game board 706 and detected by the first start opening switch 713a.

  A variable winning ball device (electric tulip) having a second starting winning port 714 (second starting port) through which a game ball can win is located below a winning device having a first starting winning port (first starting port) 713. ) 715 is provided. The game ball that has won the second start winning opening 714 is guided to the back of the game board 706 and detected by the second start opening switch 714a. The variable winning ball device 715 is opened by a solenoid 716. When the variable winning ball device 715 is in the open state, the game ball can be awarded to the second start winning port 714 (it is easy to start winning), which is advantageous for the player. In a state where the variable winning ball device 715 is in the open state, it is easier for the game ball to win the second starting winning port 714 than the first starting winning port 713. In addition, in a state where the variable winning ball device 715 is in the closed state, the game ball does not win the second start winning port 714. Note that, in a state where the variable winning ball device 715 is in the closed state, it may be configured such that although it is difficult to win, it is possible to win (that is, the game ball is difficult to win). As described above, the state where the variable winning ball device 715 is in the closed state may be a state where the game ball is difficult to win or does not win the second start winning port 714.

  Hereinafter, the first start winning port 713 and the second start winning port 714 may be collectively referred to as a start winning port or a starting port.

  When the variable winning ball device 715 is controlled to be in the open state, the game ball heading toward the variable winning ball device 715 is very likely to win the second start winning port 714. The first start winning opening 713 is provided directly below the effect display device 709, but the interval between the lower end of the effect display device 709 and the first start winning opening 713 is further reduced, or the first start winning opening is set. The winning percentage of the second starting prize opening 714 is such that the nails are densely arranged around the area 713 and the arrangement of the nails around the first starting prize opening 713 is difficult to guide the game balls to the first starting prize opening 713. You may make it make higher than the winning rate of the 1st start winning opening 713.

  Below the first special symbol display 708a, the number of effective winning balls that have entered the first start winning opening 713, that is, the first reserved memory number (the reserved memory is also referred to as the start memory or the start winning memory) 4 is displayed. There is provided a first special symbol reservation storage display 718a (not shown) consisting of two indicators (for example, LEDs). The first special symbol storage memory indicator 718a increases the number of indicators to be lit by 1 each time there is an effective start winning. Then, each time the variable display on the first special symbol display 708a is started, the number of indicators to be turned on is reduced by one.

  Below the second special symbol display 708b is a second special symbol hold comprising four indicators (for example, LEDs) for displaying the number of effective winning balls that have entered the second start winning opening 714, that is, the second reserved memory number. A storage indicator 718b (not shown) is provided. The second special symbol storage memory display 718b increases the number of indicators to be turned on by 1 every time there is an effective start winning. Then, each time the variable display on the second special symbol display 708b is started, the number of indicators to be turned on is reduced by one.

  Further, the display screen of the effect display device 709 is provided with a first reserved memory display unit 718c that displays the first reserved memory number and a second reserved memory display unit 718d that displays the second reserved memory number. (Each display area is provided). In addition, you may make it provide the area | region (sum total pending | holding memory display part) which displays the total number (sum total pending memory count) which is the sum total of the 1st pending memory count and the 2nd pending memory count. As described above, if the summation pending storage display unit for displaying the total number is provided, it is possible to easily grasp the total number of execution conditions that have not met the variable display start condition.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 46, a variable winning ball apparatus 715 that opens and closes only with respect to the second start winning opening 714 is provided. Any of the start winning ports 714 may be provided with a variable winning ball device that opens and closes.

  A reach state may occur during the effect symbol display on the effect display device 709. Here, in the reach state, when the effect symbols that are stopped and displayed in the display area of the effect display device 709 constitute a part of the combination of jackpot symbols, the variation of the effect symbols that are not yet stopped and displayed continues. Or a display state in which all or a part of the effect symbols fluctuate synchronously while constituting all or part of a combination of jackpot symbols. In other words, reach means a state in which identification information constitutes a specific display result in a plurality of variable display areas, but at least some of the variable areas are in variable display. In this embodiment, the reach state is formed, for example, in a state where the same symbol is stopped in the left and right symbol display areas and the symbol is not stopped in the middle symbol display area. The symbols stopped in the left and right symbol display areas when the reach state is formed are called reach formation symbols or reach symbols.

  The display effect in the reach state is reach effect display (reach effect). In addition, during the reach, an unusual performance may be performed with a lamp or sound. This production is called reach production. Further, in the case of reach, a character (an effect display imitating a person or the like, which is different from a design (effect design etc.)) or a display mode (for example, color etc.) of the background image of the effect display device 709 is displayed. ) May change. This change in character display and background display mode is called reach effect display. In addition, some reach is set such that when it appears, a big hit is more likely to occur than a normal reach (normal reach), and there is a high degree of reliability for the big hit. Such special (specific) reach is called super reach.

  As shown in FIG. 46, a special variable winning ball device 720 is provided below the variable winning ball device 715. The special variable winning ball apparatus 720 includes an opening / closing plate, and can be changed into an open state (first state) in which a game ball can be won and a closed state (second state) in which the game ball does not win. Device. Note that the special variable winning ball device 720 may be configured so that in the closed state, it is difficult to win, but it is possible to win (that is, it is difficult for the game ball to win). Thus, the state in which the special variable winning ball device 720 is in the closed state may be a state in which the game ball is difficult to win or does not win the special variable winning ball device 720.

  The special variable winning ball apparatus 720 is a solenoid in a specific game state (a big hit game state) that occurs when a specific display result (a big hit symbol) is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display unit 708a or the second special symbol display unit 708b. When the opening / closing plate is controlled to be in the open state by 721, the large winning opening serving as the winning area is opened. A game ball that has won a big winning opening is detected by a count switch 723.

  In the big hit gaming state, repeated continuous control is performed in which the special variable winning ball apparatus 720 repeats an open state and a closed state. In the repeated continuation control, a state where the special variable winning ball device 720 is opened is called a round. In the present embodiment, a plurality of types of jackpots are provided. When it is determined that a jackpot is to be made, one of the jackpot types is selected. In this embodiment, the control example in which the special variable winning ball apparatus 720 is opened only once in one round is shown. However, the present invention is not limited to this. You may make it perform control which makes the ball | bowl apparatus 720 open.

  A normal symbol display 710 (not shown) is provided below the effect display device 709. The normal symbol display 710 variably displays a plurality of types of identification information called “normal symbols” (for example, “◯” and “x”).

  When the game ball passes through the gate 732 and is detected by the gate switch 732a, the display variation display of the normal symbol display 710 is started. In this embodiment, the left and right lamps (the symbols can be visually recognized at the time of lighting) are alternately turned on to perform the variable display. For example, if the left lamp is turned on at the end of the variable display, it is a hit. When the stop symbol on the normal symbol display 710 is a predetermined symbol (winning symbol “◯”), the variable winning ball apparatus 715 is opened for a predetermined number of times. That is, the state of the variable winning ball device 715 is a state that is advantageous from a disadvantageous state for the player when the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a winning symbol (a state in which a game ball can be awarded at the second start winning port 714). To change.

  In the vicinity of the normal symbol display 710, a normal symbol holding storage display 741 (not shown) having four indicators (for example, LEDs) for displaying the number of winning balls that have passed through the gate 732 is provided. Every time there is a game ball passing through the gate 732, that is, every time a game ball is detected by the gate switch 732a, the normal symbol hold storage display 741 increases the number of indicators to be turned on by one. Then, each time the variable symbol display on the normal symbol indicator 710 is started, the number of indicators that are lit is reduced by one. There are four upper limit values for the number of ordinary symbols stored, and the normal symbol storage memory display 741 lights the display with these four as upper limits.

  Decorative LEDs 725 flashing and displayed during the game are provided around the left and right sides of the game area 707 of the game board 706, and an outlet 726 into which a hit ball that has not been won is taken in at the bottom. In addition, two speakers 727R and 727L that utter sound effects and sounds as predetermined sound outputs are provided on the left and right upper portions outside the game area 707. A top frame LED 728a, a left frame LED 728b, and a right frame LED 728c provided on the front frame are provided on the outer periphery upper portion, the outer periphery left portion, and the outer periphery right portion of the game area 707. For example, the top frame LED 728a, the left frame LED 728b, and the right frame LED 728c are related displays in the pseudo-continuous production as the repetitive variation pattern (each re-variation period (including the initial variation period) during one variation period). When an effect such that the effect is executed) is executed, blinking control is performed.

  The repeated variation pattern is a variation pattern in which a specific effect display is repeatedly executed a predetermined number of times after a special symbol and an effect symbol change display is started and a display result is derived and displayed, and then a reach effect is executed. . Here, the specific effect display is, for example, an effect display such as a re-change effect display, and if it is an effect display that can be repeatedly executed a predetermined number of times, for example, an effect display other than the re-change display such as a notice display is possible. May be. In this embodiment, as an example of a repeated variation pattern, an example will be described in which a pseudo variation pattern that can be repeatedly executed a predetermined number of times with re-variation as a specific effect display is used.

  Here, the pseudo-ream is an effect display that makes it appear that a plurality of fluctuations corresponding to a plurality of reserved memories are continuously performed although it is a single fluctuation corresponding to one reserved memory. Abbreviation for pseudo-continuous variation.

  In addition, the pseudo-ream is within the variation time determined with respect to one start winning prize in order to make it appear as if multiple symbols of variable display (variable display) have been executed for one starting winning prize. In this case, a special variation pattern (also referred to as a variation display pattern) in which temporary stop and re-variation are executed a predetermined number of times for all the symbol strings (left, middle, right). For example, the greater the number of re-variation repeated executions (also referred to as quasi-continuous re-variation times), the greater the reliability that will be the big hit (when the big hit is made for all the selection ratios, including when the big hit is out of place The degree of the ratio selected in the above, the ratio of the jackpot, that is, the reliability of the jackpot) is increased. More specifically, the ratio selected when it is determined that the jackpot is high. In the pseudo-continuous variation pattern, a combination of symbols temporarily stopped in the effect display device 709 is called a temporary stop symbol combination. The combination of temporary stop symbols is determined as one of the pseudo consecutive chances among a plurality of types of chances (hereinafter referred to as pseudo continuous chances) composed of combinations of symbols other than the jackpot symbol combination. Further, when the pseudo continuous fluctuation is executed, some reach effect may be executed as a final reach state.

  Also, a prize ball LED 751 that is turned on when there is a remaining number of prize balls is provided in the vicinity of the left frame LED 728b, and a ball cut LED 752 that is turned on when the supply ball is cut is provided in the vicinity of the right frame LED 728c. . The top frame LED 728a, the left frame LED 728b, the right frame LED 728c, and the decoration LED 725 are an example of an effect light emitter provided in the pachinko gaming machine 700. In addition to the above-described various LEDs for production (decoration), LEDs and lamps for production are installed.

  In addition, a prepaid card unit (hereinafter also simply referred to as “card unit”) that enables lending a ball by inserting a prepaid card is installed adjacent to the pachinko gaming machine 700 (not shown).

  In FIG. 47, (A) shows a hit type table showing the characteristics of the hit type control including the big hit and the small hit, and (B) shows the base and the variation time state after the end of the big hit gaming state of the sudden big hit. Shown is an abrupt big hit base / fluctuation time state selection table used to determine.

  In the hit type table of FIG. 47, for each hit type in the big hit and the small hit, the big hit probability after the end of the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state, the base after the end of the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state, the big hit The variation time after the end of the gaming state or the small hit gaming state, the number of times of opening in the big hit (number of rounds), and the opening time of each round are shown. As shown in FIG. 47, as the jackpot gaming state with different numbers of rounds, there are provided a plurality of types of jackpot gaming states of 15 rounds of jackpot gaming state and 2 rounds of jackpot gaming state. In the small hit, a small hit game state with the same number of times of opening and open time as the two round big hit game state.

  Specifically, in the 15-round big hit game state, after the special variable winning ball apparatus 720 is in the open state, a predetermined open state end condition (a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds) has elapsed in the open state). Alternatively, the closed state is established in response to the establishment of a predetermined number (for example, 10) of winning balls in which a winning ball is generated. When the opening end condition is satisfied, a right to continue is generated, and the special variable winning ball apparatus 720 is opened again. The generation of the continuation right is repeated until the number of releases in the big hit gaming state reaches 15 rounds (final round), which is a predetermined upper limit value.

  Also, in the two-round big hit game state, after the special variable winning ball apparatus 720 is in the open state, a predetermined open state end condition (a predetermined period (for example, 0.5 seconds) has elapsed in the open state) Alternatively, the closed state is established in response to the establishment of a predetermined number (for example, 10) of winning balls in which a winning ball is generated. When the opening end condition is satisfied, a right to continue is generated, and the special variable winning ball apparatus 720 is opened again. The generation of the continuation right is repeated until the number of times of opening in the big hit gaming state reaches two rounds (final round) at which a predetermined upper limit value is reached.

  In this way, the big win of 2 rounds is allowed up to the number of times of opening the big prize opening is less than 15 rounds (2 times in this embodiment), but the opening time of the big prize opening is short (for example, 0 .5 seconds) type of jackpot (type). In the case of the present embodiment, as a big hit of two rounds, the opening time of the grand prize opening is extremely short (0.5 seconds), and substantially a prize ball (a prize ball paid out for the prize) is obtained. There is a hit that is not possible.

  In addition, as a big hit of two rounds, it is possible to provide only a hit where a prize ball cannot be obtained, or only a hit where a prize ball can be obtained. Both a win and a win from which a prize ball can be obtained may be provided.

  Among the “big hits”, after being controlled to the big hit game state of 15 rounds or 2 rounds, the probability that the special game state is determined to be a big hit compared to the normal state (the normal game state which is not the probability change state) A type of jackpot (type) that shifts to a high probability state (an abbreviation of a probability variation state, also referred to as a high probability state) is called “probability big hit”. In the present embodiment, the special gaming state is controlled to a time-short state in which the variation time (variation display period) of the special symbol or the production symbol is shortened from the non-time-short state in association with the probability variation state. There is. Note that the special gaming state may be controlled to the short time state independently of the probability variation state.

  In this way, the transition time to the short-time state reduces the variation time of the special symbol and the production symbol. Therefore, when the short-time state is reached, it is easy for an effective start winning to occur, and a big hit game may be performed. Rise.

  Of the “big hit”, the type of jackpot (type) that does not shift to the probability change state after being controlled to the big hit gaming state of 15 rounds or 2 rounds is called “ordinary big hit”. In the present embodiment, an example in which a normal big hit is provided for a big hit of 15 rounds is shown. In addition, a “normal jackpot” may be provided for either or both of 15 round jackpots and 2 round jackpots. Also, the normal big hits may not be provided for both the 15 round big hits and the two round big hits.

  In addition, as a special gaming state, an electric chew support that facilitates (higher frequency) winning in the variable winning ball device 715 by increasing the frequency with which the variable winning ball device 715 is opened in association with the probability changing state. It may be controlled to the control state. Note that the special game state may be controlled to the electric chew support control state independently of the probability change state.

  Here, electric Chu support control will be described. As electric support control, normal symbol variation time (time from the start of variation display to display result derivation display time) is shortened and the display result is derived and displayed at an early stage (normal symbol shortening control), normal symbol Control to increase the probability that the stop symbol of the game will be a winning symbol (ordinary symbol probability control), control to increase the opening time of the variable winning ball device 715 (opening time extension control), and increase the number of opening of the variable winning ball device 715 Control (opening number increase control) is performed. When such control is performed, the time ratio during which the variable winning ball apparatus 715 is open is higher than when the control is not performed, so the winning frequency to the second start winning opening 714 is increased. As a result, the game ball becomes easier to start and win (the execution conditions for the variable display in the special symbol displays 708a and 708b and the effect display device 709 are more easily established). In addition, by increasing the winning frequency to the second starting winning port 714 by such control, a gaming state is achieved in which the frequency of establishment of the second starting condition and / or the frequency of execution of the variable display of the second special symbol is increased.

  The state (high frequency state) in which the winning frequency to the second start winning opening 714 is increased by such electric Chu support control is the number of game balls to be paid out as a winning ball according to the winning with respect to the number of shot balls. Since the ratio “base” is higher than when the control is not performed, it is called “high base state”. Further, when such control is not performed, it is called a “low base state”. Such control is control for facilitating winning to the variable winning ball apparatus 715 by supporting the winning with the variable winning ball apparatus 715, that is, the electric tulip, and is referred to as “electric chew support control”.

  Furthermore, as the electric chew support control, by shifting to a state in which any one of a normal symbol shortening control state, a normal symbol probability changing control state, an opening time extension control state, and an opening number increase control state are combined, You may make it transfer to a high base state. In addition, as the electric chew support control, by shifting to any one of the normal symbol shortening control state, the normal symbol probability changing control state, the opening time extension control state, and the opening number increasing control state, You may make it transfer to a state. As described above, as the electric chew support control, any one of a normal symbol shortening control state, a normal symbol probability changing control state, an opening time extension control state, and an opening number increasing control state, any one of a plurality (all) Any control may be performed as long as the control is performed in a combined state or a combined state.

  In the present embodiment, the special gaming state may be controlled to the time reduction state and the electric chew support control state accompanying the probability changing state. Note that the special gaming state may be controlled to the time-saving state and the electric chew support control state independently of the probability changing state. In addition, as a relationship between the short time state and the electric chew support control state in the special game state, the electric chew support control state may be controlled in association with the short time state. You may make it control to a control state.

  In the case of this embodiment, after the big hit gaming state is finished, the special gaming state is controlled to the electric chew support control state when controlled to the probability variation state, and the electric power is controlled when controlled to the probability variation state. In some cases, the Chu support control state is not controlled. In addition, after the end of the big hit gaming state, when the normal state is entered without being controlled to the probability variation state, it may be controlled to the electric chew support control state in which the period is limited by the number of variable displays.

  In this embodiment, “high probability state (probability variation state)” and “low probability state (non-probability variation state)” are used as terms indicating the state of jackpot probability, and terms indicating a combination of base states are used. , “High base state (electric Chu support control state)” and “low base state (non-electric Chu support control state)” are used.

  Further, in this embodiment, “low accuracy low base state”, “high accuracy low base state”, and “high accuracy high base state” are used as terms indicating a combination of the big hit probability state and the base state. Use. The “low probability low base state” is a state indicating that the state of the big hit probability is the low probability state and the base state is the low base state. The “highly accurate low base state” is a state indicating that the state of the big hit probability is the high probability state and the base state is the low base state. The “high probability high base state” is a state indicating that the state of the big hit probability is the high probability state and the base state is the high base state. Note that, for example, when performing electric Chu support control for a case where the state of the big hit probability becomes a low probability state after the big hit gaming state ends, as in the normal big hit, the state of the big hit probability is a low probability state, and The base state is the “low-accuracy and high-base state”, which is a state indicating that the base state is the high-base state.

  As shown in FIG. 47, as the big hit of 15 rounds, a plurality of types of big hits, a normal big hit and a probable big hit, are provided. In addition, as a big hit of the two rounds, an abrupt big hit is provided.

  The normal jackpot is a jackpot that is controlled to the non-probability changing state, the time-short state, and the electric chew support control state (low-accuracy high-base state) after the end of the 15-round jackpot gaming state. The probability variation jackpot is a jackpot in which control is performed to shift to the probability variation state, the short time state, and the electric chew support control state (high probability high base state) after the end of the 15-round jackpot gaming state. In the probability variation big hit, the probability variation state, the time reduction state, and the electric Chu support control state continue for a period until the condition that the next big hit occurs is satisfied.

  In the normal big hit, the period until the shorter condition is satisfied, which is the condition that the time reduction state is executed a predetermined number of times of 100 times of the variable display or the condition that the next big hit occurs. continue. The number of times of variable display in which the time reduction state continues is also referred to as the time reduction number.

  The sudden hit big hit is a big hit in which, after the end of the two round big hit gaming state, control is performed to shift to the probability changing state, the non-time-saving state, and the non-electric Chu support control state (highly accurate low base state). In the sudden big hit, the probability variation state continues for a period until the condition that the next big hit occurs is satisfied.

  In the big hit, the number of rounds is small (twice) and the opening of the big prize opening is very short (open for 0.5 seconds). When notifying that it has become, it is possible to make it appear to the player as if it has suddenly changed into a certain probability change state, which is called “sudden probability change big hit”. “Suddenly probable big hit” may be referred to by the abbreviation “surprise big hit” or “surprise”. In this embodiment, the two-round probability variation big hit is referred to as “surprise big hit”. Such a big hit is a hit where a winning ball is not substantially obtained since the half-second opening is performed only twice in the big hit gaming state.

The small hit is a hit (advantageous state) in which the special variable winning ball apparatus 720 is opened with the same number of times and opening time as the sudden big hit in the gaming state (small hit gaming state) when the small hit is reached. When a small hit is made, after the small hit gaming state, both the big hit probability and the base state are not changed from those before the start of the small hit gaming state. In this way, the small hit is a hit in which a gaming state such as a big hit probability and a base state is maintained after the small hit gaming state ends and before the start of the small hit gaming state. In this embodiment, the small hit is an example in which the special variable winning ball apparatus 720 is opened in the small hit gaming state with the same number of times of opening and the same opening time as the big hit big hit. Not limited to small hits, the opening mode of the special variable winning ball apparatus 720 does not completely coincide with the opening mode at the time of the big hit, but seems to be difficult to distinguish from the opening mode at the big hit. It may be. In other words, the small win may be a hit of the special variable winning ball device 720 when the special variable winning ball device 720 is opened with substantially the same number of times of opening and substantially the same opening time as the sudden big hit.

  If it is determined that the big hit gaming state of the low probability low base state will be the high probability low base state after the big hit gaming state of the high probability low hit state, the base state will be small in the low probability low base state. The low base state is the same as the state after the end of the small hit gaming state when it is determined to win. This makes it difficult for the player to identify whether the winning position is a big hit or a small hit when the winning hole is opened twice in the low probability low base state. The fun of the game is improved.

  It should be noted that the normal big hit may be a big hit in which control is performed to the non-probability changing state, the non-time-short state, and the non-electric Chu support control state (low-probability low base state). Further, the probability variation big hit may be a big hit in which control is performed to be a probability variation state, a non-time-short state, and a non-electric Chu support control state (high probability low base state). In addition, the sudden hit big hit may be a big hit in which control is performed to change into a probability changing state, a time reduction state, and an electric Chu support control state (highly accurate high base state).

  In addition, for the big hit game hit, after the big hit game state, the base state is set to the low base state and the variable time state is set to the non-time-short state, and after the big hit game state is finished, the base state is increased. As the base state, there may be provided separately the second sudden hit big hits in which the variable time state is the short time state, and these sudden hit big hits may be selected at a predetermined ratio.

  In this way, when the first and second big hits are provided, for example, the second special big hit is selected as the second special symbol that is shorter in time than the first special symbol. What is necessary is just to set the ratio made high. In this way, in the electric chew support control state, since the variable winning ball device 715 is frequently changed to the open state, the frequency of the variable display on the second special symbol display 708b is increased. The 2nd round winning big hit is an unfavorable hit for the player in terms of the number of winning balls obtained, compared to the 15th round normal big hit and the probable big hit, due to the open mode of the special variable winning ball apparatus 720. Players are easily discouraged. Therefore, in the probability variation state and the electric chew support control state, the second special symbol display 708b has a two-round sudden probability big hit which is disadvantageous for the player in terms of the number of prize balls obtained from the normal round of 15 rounds and the probability variation big hit. Even if it occurs due to the display result, if the rate of control in the time-saving state is increased, the player is controlled not only in discouragement like in the case of non-time-saving state but also in the time-saving state. In some cases, the stored memory data is digested at an early stage, so that the player can be satisfied.

  In addition, as a hit where a prize ball cannot be obtained substantially such as a big hit, it is a big hit of 15 rounds. However, since the opening time per round is extremely short, for example, 0.1 seconds, It is also possible that no prize ball is obtained. In addition, as a winning where a prize ball is not substantially obtained, a prize ball is substantially obtained by executing at least one of a small number of rounds or a short opening time per round. Anything that doesn't exist. Specifically, for a big hit (similarly for a small hit) for which no winning ball can be obtained, the number of times of opening is 2 and the opening time is 0.5 seconds, or the number of times of opening is 15 and the opening time is 0.00. What is necessary is just to set like 1 second. Also, instead of a big hit (similarly for a small hit) where no winning ball can be obtained, a big hit gaming state rather than a big hit of 15 rounds, for example, a big hit with two open times and an opening time of 29 seconds Due to the short total open time, the big hit with fewer prize balls than the 15 round big hit may be provided.

  In addition, the number of rounds is the same as the big hit, but the number of rounds is the same, such as providing a big hit with an opening pattern with a long opening time and a big hit with an opening pattern with a short opening time. A plurality of patterns with different opening patterns are provided, so that the selection is executed at different selection ratios when the first special symbol fluctuation display is a big hit and when the second special symbol fluctuation display is a big hit. It may be.

  The big hit and the small hit are the same as the number of times and the opening time of the special variable winning ball apparatus 720, and it is difficult for the player to recognize whether the big hit or the small hit. Furthermore, since the big hit gaming state is not controlled to the short-time state after the end of the big hit gaming state, and the electric chew support control is not performed, compared with the small hit where the big hit probability and the base do not change after the end of the small hit gaming state, In the low-probability-low base state, it is difficult for the player to distinguish between the operation status after the end of the big hit gaming state for the sudden hit big hit and after the end of the small hit gaming state. As a result, when a common performance that does not notify that the probability change state is performed after the end of the big hit gaming state of the smash hit big hit and after the end of the small hit gaming state, whether or not it is in the probability changed state It is difficult for players to recognize. Since such a control state is a state in which the probability variation state is latent, it is called a latent effect state, and the control for making such a latent effect state is called latent effect control. By executing a common performance after the end of the big hit or the small hit, latent production control is performed in which it is impossible to specify whether the state is a probability variation state or a non-probability variation state. Whether or not there is, it is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

  In addition, for the sudden hit, the control may be performed so as to shift to the probability changing state, the time reduction state, and the electric chew support control state (high accuracy high base state). When performing such control, it is not necessary to provide a small hit, and furthermore, control is performed to shift to the effect state indicating the high-accuracy base state without executing the above-described latent effect. May be.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 700 according to this embodiment, the effect control microcomputer 7100 does not notify that it is in a probable change state after the end of the big hit gaming state of the sudden hit big hit and after the end of the small hit gaming state. The latent effect control for performing a common effect is performed. By performing such latent effect control, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation as to whether or not the player is in a probable change state, and to improve the interest of the game.

  In the case of providing a “normal big hit” as in the present embodiment for the big hit of 15 rounds, the number of rounds is controlled to the same short-time state as that of the same probability variable big hit. It is difficult for players to recognize. Therefore, the above-described latent effect state may be controlled by performing a common effect that does not notify that the probability variation state is in the probability variation big hit and the normal big hit.

  FIG. 48 is a block diagram showing an example of a circuit configuration of the main board (game control board) 731. 48 also shows a payout control board 737, an effect control board 780, and the like. A game control microcomputer (corresponding to game control means) 7560 for controlling the pachinko gaming machine 700 according to a program is mounted on the main board 731.

  The game control microcomputer 7560 includes a ROM 754 for storing a game control (game progress control) program and the like, a RAM 755 as storage means used as a work memory, a CPU 756 for performing control operations in accordance with the program, and an I / O port unit. 757. In this embodiment, the ROM 754 and the RAM 755 are built in the game control microcomputer 7560. That is, the game control microcomputer 7560 is a one-chip microcomputer. The one-chip microcomputer only needs to incorporate at least the RAM 755 in addition to the CPU 756, and the ROM 754 may be externally attached or incorporated. Further, the I / O port unit 757 may be externally attached. The game control microcomputer 7560 further includes a random number circuit 7503 for generating hardware random numbers (random numbers generated by the hardware circuit).

  In the game control microcomputer 7560, the CPU 756 executes control in accordance with the program stored in the ROM 754, so that the game control microcomputer 7560 (or CPU 756) executes (or performs processing) hereinafter. Specifically, the CPU 756 executes control according to a program. The same applies to microcomputers mounted on substrates other than the main substrate 731.

  The random number circuit 7503 is a hardware circuit used to generate a random number for determination for determining whether or not to win a big hit based on the display result of the special symbol variation display. Random number circuit 7503 updates numerical data in accordance with a set update rule within a numerical range in which an initial value (for example, 0) and an upper limit value (for example, 65535) are set, and generates random timing. Based on the fact that the starting winning time is the time of reading (extracting) the numerical data, it has a random number generation function in which the read numerical data becomes a random value.

  The random number circuit 7503 has a numeric data update range selection setting function (initial value selection setting function and upper limit selection selection function), numeric data update rule selection setting function, and numeric data update rule selection. It has various functions such as a switching function. With such a function, the randomness of the generated random numbers can be improved.

  Further, the game control microcomputer 7560 has a function of setting an initial value of numerical data updated by the random number circuit 7503. For example, a predetermined calculation is performed using an ID number of the game control microcomputer 7560 (an ID number assigned to each product of the game control microcomputer 7560) stored in a predetermined storage area such as the ROM 754. The numerical data obtained by the execution is set as the initial value of the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 7503. By performing such processing, the randomness of the random number generated by the random number circuit 7503 can be further improved.

  The game control microcomputer 7560 reads numerical data as random R from the random number circuit 7503 when a start winning to the first start port switch 713a or the second start port switch 714a occurs, and starts to change the special symbol and effect symbol Sometimes it is determined whether or not to make a jackpot display result as a specific display result based on the random R, that is, whether or not to make a jackpot display result. Then, when it is determined to be a big hit, the gaming state is shifted to a big hit gaming state as a specific gaming state advantageous to the player.

  The RAM 755 is a backup RAM as a non-volatile storage means, part or all of which is backed up by a backup power source created on the power supply board. That is, even if the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped, a part or all of the contents of the RAM 755 is stored for a predetermined period (until the backup power supply cannot be supplied because the capacitor as the backup power supply is discharged). In particular, at least data corresponding to the game state, that is, the control state of the game control means (a special symbol process flag, the value of each reserved storage number counter, etc.) and data indicating the number of unpaid winning balls are stored in the backup RAM. The data corresponding to the control state of the game control means is data necessary for restoring the control state before the occurrence of a power failure or the like based on the data when the power is restored after a power failure or the like occurs. Further, data corresponding to the control state and data indicating the number of unpaid winning balls are defined as data indicating the progress state of the game. In this embodiment, it is assumed that the entire RAM 755 is backed up.

  A reset signal (not shown) from the power supply board is input to the reset terminal of the game control microcomputer 7560. A reset circuit that generates a reset signal supplied to the game control microcomputer 7560 and the like is mounted on the power supply board. When the reset signal becomes high level, the game control microcomputer 7560 and the like are in an operable state, and when the reset signal becomes low level, the game control microcomputer 7560 and the like are in an operation stop state. Therefore, an allowable signal that allows the operation of the game control microcomputer 7560 or the like is output during a period in which the reset signal is at a high level, and a game control microcomputer in which the reset signal is at a low level. The operation stop signal for stopping the operation such as 7560 is output. Note that the reset circuit may be mounted on each electric component control board (a board on which a microcomputer for controlling the electric parts is mounted).

  Furthermore, a power-off signal indicating that the power supply voltage from the power supply board has dropped below a predetermined value is input to the input port of the game control microcomputer 7560. That is, the power supply board monitors the voltage value of a predetermined voltage (for example, DC30V, DC5V, etc.) used in the gaming machine, and when the voltage value decreases to a predetermined value (the power supply voltage is reduced). A power supply monitoring circuit that outputs a power-off signal indicating that). Further, a clear signal (not shown) indicating that a clear switch for instructing to clear the contents of the RAM is operated is input to the input port of the game control microcomputer 7560.

  An input driver circuit 758 for supplying detection signals from the gate switch 732a, the first start port switch 713a, the second start port switch 714a and the count switch 723 to the game control microcomputer 7560 is also mounted on the main board 731. Also, an output circuit 759 for driving a solenoid 716 for opening / closing the variable winning ball device 715 and a solenoid 721 for opening / closing the special variable winning ball device 720 forming a big winning opening according to a command from the game control microcomputer 7560. It is mounted on the main board 731. Further, an information output circuit (not shown) for outputting an information output signal such as jackpot information indicating the occurrence of a jackpot gaming state to an external device such as a hall computer is also mounted on the main board 731.

  In this embodiment, the effect control means (configured by the effect control microcomputer) mounted on the effect control board 780 instructs the effect contents from the game control microcomputer 7560 via the relay board 777. An effect control command is received, and display control of an effect display device 709 that displays effect symbols in a variable manner is performed.

  In this embodiment, an operation signal from the chance button 7111 is input to the effect control board 780, and the effect control means mounted on the effect control board 780 responds to the operation signal from the chance button 7111. Perform the production.

  Further, in this embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine 700 includes an absence sensor 7757 that detects that the player has left. This away sensor 7757 is the same as the away sensor 57 of the slot machine 1 of the first embodiment. The away sensor 7757 is connected to the effect control board 780. The detection signal of the away sensor 7757 is input to the effect control board 780.

  FIG. 49 is a block diagram illustrating a circuit configuration example of the relay board 777, the effect control board 780, the lamp driver board 735, and the audio output board 770. In the example shown in FIG. 49, the lamp driver board 735 and the audio output board 770 are not equipped with a microcomputer, but may be equipped with a microcomputer. Further, without providing the lamp driver board 735 and the audio output board 770, only the effect control board 780 may be provided for effect control.

  The effect control board 780 is equipped with an effect control microcomputer 7100 including an effect control CPU 7101 and a RAM. The RAM may be externally attached. In the effect control board 780, the effect control CPU 7101 operates in accordance with a program stored in a built-in or external ROM (not shown), and receives a signal from the main board 731 input via the relay board 777. In response to the (production control INT signal), the production control command is received via the input driver 7102 and the input port 7103. Further, the effect control CPU 7101 causes a VDP (video display processor) 7109 to perform display control of the effect display device 709 based on the effect control command.

  In this embodiment, a VDP 7109 that performs display control of the effect display device 709 in cooperation with the effect control microcomputer 7100 is mounted on the effect control board 780. The VDP 7109 has an address space independent of the effect control microcomputer 7100, and maps the VRAM therein. The VRAM is a buffer memory for expanding image data generated by the VDP. Then, the VDP 7109 outputs the image data in the VRAM to the effect display device 709.

  The effect control CPU 7101 reads necessary data from a character ROM (not shown) in accordance with the received effect control command. The character ROM is for storing character image data displayed on the effect display device 709, specifically, a person, characters, figures, symbols, etc. (including effect symbols) in advance. The effect control CPU 7101 outputs the data read from the character ROM to the VDP 7109. The VDP 7109 executes display control based on data input from the effect control CPU 7101.

  The effect control CPU 7101 executes the effect according to the operation signal input from the chance button 7111.

  The effect control board 780 is connected to a power supply circuit (not shown), and the effect control CPU 7101 of the effect control board 780 has a power supply monitoring function for monitoring that power is supplied from the power supply circuit.

  The effect control command and the effect control INT signal are first input to the input driver 7102 on the effect control board 780. The input driver 7102 allows the signal input from the relay board 777 to pass only in the direction toward the inside of the effect control board 780 (does not pass the signal in the direction from the inside of the effect control board 780 to the relay board 777). It is also a unidirectional circuit as a regulating means.

  The relay board 777 allows signal input from the main board 731 to pass only in the direction toward the effect control board 780 (no signal is passed in the direction from the effect control board 780 to the relay board 777). The unidirectional circuit 774 is mounted. For example, a diode or a transistor is used as the unidirectional circuit. FIG. 49 illustrates a diode. A unidirectional circuit is provided for each signal. Further, since the effect control command and the effect control INT signal are output from the main board 731 via the output port 7571 which is a unidirectional circuit, a signal from the relay board 777 to the inside of the main board 731 is restricted. That is, the signal from the relay board 777 does not enter the inside of the main board 731 (the game control microcomputer 7560 side). The output port 7571 is a part of the I / O port unit 757 shown in FIG. Further, a signal driver circuit which is a unidirectional circuit may be further provided outside the output port 7571 (on the relay board 777 side).

  Further, the effect control CPU 7101 outputs a signal for driving the LED to the lamp driver board 735 via the output port 7105. Further, the effect control CPU 7101 outputs sound number data to the audio output board 770 via the output port 7104.

  In the lamp driver board 735, a signal for driving the LED is input to the LED driver 7352 via the input driver 7351. The LED driver 7352 supplies a drive signal to each LED provided on the frame side such as the top frame LED 728a, the left frame LED 728b, and the right frame LED 728c. Further, a drive signal is supplied to the decoration LED 725 provided on the game board 706 side. When a light emitter other than the LED is provided, a drive circuit (driver) for driving the light emitter is mounted on the lamp driver substrate 735.

  In the audio output board 770, the sound number data is input to the speech synthesis IC 7703 via the input driver 7702. The voice synthesizing IC 7703 generates voice and sound effects corresponding to the sound number data and outputs them to the amplifier circuit 7705. The amplifier circuit 7705 outputs an audio signal obtained by amplifying the output level of the speech synthesis IC 7703 to a level corresponding to the volume set by the volume 7706 to the speakers 727R and 727L. The voice data ROM 7704 stores control data corresponding to the sound number data. The control data corresponding to the sound number data is a collection of data indicating the sound effect or sound output mode in a time-series manner in a predetermined period (for example, the changing period of the effect design).

  FIG. 50 is a diagram illustrating transition of screens displayed on the mobile terminal according to the fourth embodiment. Referring to FIG. 50, the screen in FIG. 50 (A) is the same screen as the screen in FIG. 41 (C).

  The screens of FIG. 50B and FIG. 50C are the screens of FIG. 41D and FIG. 41E, and the contents related to the gaming history of the slot machine that the character is talking about are displayed in the game of the pachinko gaming machine 700. It has been changed to history-related content.

  The screen in FIG. 50D is obtained by changing the content related to the game history of the slot machine on the screen in FIG. 41F to the content related to the game history of the pachinko gaming machine 700.

  FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing a flow of main menu display processing executed in the pachinko gaming machine 700 according to the fourth embodiment. This main menu display process is obtained by changing the main menu display process of the slot machine 1 of FIG. 28 described in the first embodiment to a process suitable for the pachinko gaming machine 700.

  Referring to FIG. 51, in the main menu display process, first, in step S1211A, the effect control CPU 7101 of the effect control board 780 of the pachinko gaming machine 700 determines whether or not the effect symbol is being variably displayed. When it is determined that the variable display is being performed (when YES is determined in step S1211A), the effect control CPU 7101 advances the process to be performed to the process of step S1216.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the variable display is being performed (NO in step S1211A), the processing from step S1212 to step S1214 is executed. Since the processing from step S1212 to step S1214 is the same as the processing described with reference to FIG. 28, overlapping description will not be repeated.

  After step S1213 and step S1214, in step S1215, the effect control CPU 7101 displays on the effect display device 709 that the main menu, the password input screen, and the like are interrupted when it has developed into super reach. The VDP 7109 is controlled so as to be displayed over the menu.

  In step S1216, the effect control CPU 7101 determines whether or not the effect on the effect display device 709 has been developed into a super reach. If it is determined that it has developed (YES in step S1216), in step S1217, the effect control CPU 7101 hides the main menu, the password input screen, and the like, and displays super reach on the effect display device 709. Control the VDP 7109.

  After step S1217, and when it is determined that it has not developed into super reach (when NO is determined in step S1216), in step S1218, the effect control CPU 7101 shows that the display result of the variation display of the effect symbols is not good. Judge whether or not.

  When it is determined that it has been lost (when YES is determined in step S1218), in step S1219, the effect control CPU 7101 redisplays the effect display device 709 on the effect display device 709, such as the main menu hidden in step S1217. The VDP 7109 is controlled to do so. After step S1219 and when it is determined that there is no deviation (when NO is determined in step S1218), the effect control CPU 7101 returns the process to be executed to the caller process of this process.

  As described above, the system related to the display of the game history in the slot machine 1 described in the third embodiment changes the content of the game history from the content related to the slot machine 1 to the content related to other types of gaming machines such as the pachinko gaming machine 700. It is possible to easily deal with other repaired gaming machines such as the pachinko gaming machine 700 by simply changing to the above.

[Modifications of Third Embodiment and Fourth Embodiment]
(1) In the third embodiment and the fourth embodiment, the special effect is a display effect, but is not limited thereto, and may be a sound effect, or a portable terminal. An effect produced by the vibration function 1100 or an effect produced by the lamp of the mobile terminal 1100 may be used.

  (2) In the third embodiment and the fourth embodiment, a digest display template is stored in advance in the storage unit 120 of the management server 1200, and this template is customized by the game history. Thus, it is transmitted to the mobile terminal 1100 and the mobile terminal 1100 performs the digest display.

  However, the present invention is not limited to this, and data for special effects is transmitted from the gaming machine such as the slot machine 1 and the pachinko gaming machine 700 to the portable terminal 1100 (may be included in the above-described two-dimensional code or infrared communication) For example, the special effect may be executed based on the transmitted data.

  Also, data for determining a special effect (data different from the game history) is transmitted from the gaming machine to the management server 1200, and the content of the special effect is determined by the management server 1200 based on the data. Good.

  Further, the content of the special effect may be an effect in which a special wallpaper that varies depending on the content of the game history is given to the mobile terminal 1100, or a mini game whose result varies depending on the content of the game history is executed. Such an effect may be used.

  As a mini game, it is conceivable that characters compete and the development of the competition varies depending on the contents of the game history. For example, in the case of an excellent game history, competition for development is performed so that the player can feel such content. Thereby, the player can feel again that the game history was an excellent result by watching the mini game of such a development competition.

  (3) In the third embodiment and the fourth embodiment, a link for accessing a player's published game history or the like is displayed on the bulletin board of the game history site.

  However, the present invention is not limited to this, and in the application specific to the model of the portable terminal 1100 of the player, a link for accessing the player's published game history or the like is posted on SNS (Social Network Service). Alternatively, it may be registered in a general information sharing server that can be accessed by a general browser or the like and displayed on the mobile terminal 1100. In this way, a link for accessing a player's published game history or the like is posted where everyone can access, so that not only from his / her own mobile terminal 1100 but also from the mobile terminal 1100 of another person. Also, it becomes possible to access the game history of the player.

  In addition, a link for accessing a player's published game history or the like may be distributed by e-mail to a user registered in a general information sharing server such as the above-mentioned SNS. The fact that the game history of a certain player has been updated may be delivered by e-mail, or data such as the game history digest display described above is attached to the e-mail and delivered. You may be made to do.

  (4) In the above-described embodiment, the invention has been described as the gaming system 1001. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the invention can be regarded as a gaming machine such as the management server 1200, the portable terminal 1100, the slot machine 1, or the pachinko gaming machine 700 included in the gaming system 1001, and is performed by each device. The invention can be grasped as a method, and the invention can be grasped as a program executed by each device.

[Summary of embodiment]
Next, main effects obtained by the embodiment described above will be described.

(1-1) A gaming system (for example, gaming system 1001)
Management for managing a gaming machine (for example, slot machine 1, pachinko gaming machine 700) capable of performing a predetermined game, and a game history (including not only a game result but also a halfway progress) of the player. A gaming system including a device (for example, management server 1200),
The gaming machine is
Game history of a period from when the predetermined start operation is performed to when the predetermined end operation is performed after a predetermined start operation by the player is performed Output means (for example, a two-dimensional code for photographing with the portable terminal 1100 as shown in FIG. 14 is displayed. Output to the management server 1200 directly or via a card unit. You may)
The management device
The game history information output by the output means (for example, may be received from the portable terminal 1100 as shown in step S101 of FIG. 37, or may be received directly from the gaming machine or via a card unit. ) Based on the identification means for identifying the game history (for example, step S102 in FIG. 37),
Data for displaying the game history specified by the specifying means (including those updated and reflected in the managed game history) and special effects determined based on the game history (for example, , Display effects, voice effects, and the like are transmitted by the portable terminal (eg, step S153 in FIG. 38, step S154 in FIG. 38, step S185 in FIG. 39, step S186, FIG. 40). Steps S195 and S196).

  According to such a configuration, when a predetermined start operation is performed by the player after the player performs a predetermined start operation, the predetermined end operation is performed after the predetermined start operation is performed by the player. The game history information that can specify the game history during the period until the operation is performed is output. Based on the game history information output from the gaming machine by the management device, the game history is specified, the data for displaying the specified game history on the portable terminal, and the special effects determined based on the game history Data to be performed by the mobile terminal can be transmitted to the mobile terminal.

  For this reason, not only the game history is displayed on the mobile terminal, but also a special effect determined based on the game history is performed. As a result, it is possible to provide a gaming system that can provide interest in acquiring a gaming history.

(1-2) In the gaming system of (1-1) above,
The transmission means has a special effect (for example, FIG. 41 (FIG. 41 (FIG. D) can be transmitted.

  According to such a configuration, the special effect data determined based on the game history of the specific item among the specified game history can be transmitted to the portable terminal by the management device. For this reason, the special effect determined based on the game history of the specific item is performed on the mobile terminal. As a result, by making the specific item an item that the player pays attention to, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the special effect.

(1-3) In the gaming system of (1-1) or (1-2) above,
The management device
Receiving means (for example, step S152 in FIG. 38, step S184 in FIG. 39, step S194 in FIG. 40) for receiving information indicating the selection result by the player as to whether or not to perform the special effect from the portable terminal;
The transmission means provides data for causing the mobile terminal to perform a special effect determined based on the game history on condition that information indicating a selection result indicating that the special effect is performed is received by the receiving means. Transmission is possible (for example, step S153 in FIG. 38, step S185 in FIG. 39, and step S195 in FIG. 40).

  According to such a configuration, information indicating the selection result by the player whether or not to perform the special effect is received from the portable terminal, and information indicating the selection result that the special effect is performed is received by the management device. On this condition, data for causing the mobile terminal to perform a special effect determined based on the game history can be transmitted. For this reason, the player can be able to see the special effect when he / she wants to see it, and can not see the special effect when he / she does not want to see it. As a result, special effects that meet the needs of the player can be performed.

(1-6) The management device (for example, the management server 1200)
A management device that manages a player's game history (including not only game results but also intermediate progress) in a gaming machine (for example, slot machine 1, pachinko gaming machine 700) capable of performing a predetermined game,
It is output from the gaming machine (for example, a two-dimensional code for photographing with the portable terminal 1100 as shown in FIG. 14 is displayed. Alternatively, it may be output directly to the management server 1200 or via a card unit). Further, after a predetermined start operation by the player, when a predetermined end operation is performed by the player, a period of time from when the predetermined start operation is performed to when the predetermined end operation is performed The game history information that can specify the game history (for example, it may be received from the portable terminal 1100 as shown in step S101 of FIG. 37, or may be received directly from the gaming machine or via the card unit). Based on the specifying means (for example, step S102 of FIG. 37) for specifying the game history based on
Data for displaying the game history specified by the specifying means (including those updated and reflected in the managed game history) and special effects determined based on the game history (for example, , Display effects, voice effects, and the like are transmitted by the portable terminal (eg, step S153 in FIG. 38, step S154 in FIG. 38, step S185 in FIG. 39, step S186, FIG. 40). Steps S195 and S196).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to provide a management device capable of giving interest to acquiring a game history.

(1-7) A gaming machine (for example, slot machine 1, pachinko gaming machine 700)
A gaming machine capable of performing a predetermined game,
Game history of a period from when the predetermined start operation is performed to when the predetermined end operation is performed after a predetermined start operation by the player is performed Output means (for example, a two-dimensional code for photographing with the portable terminal 1100 as shown in FIG. 14 is displayed. Output to the management server 1200 directly or via a card unit. You may)
The output means may be received from the game history information (as shown in step S101 of FIG. 37 from the portable terminal 1100 by the management device that manages the game history of the player in the gaming machine, or directly from the gaming machine or The game history specified (for example, step S102 in FIG. 37) (including those updated and reflected in the managed game history) may be received based on the mobile terminal. 38 and data for causing the portable terminal to perform special effects (for example, display effects, voice effects, etc.) determined based on the game history can be transmitted to the portable terminal (for example, FIG. 38). Step S153, Step S154, Step S185 in FIG. 39, Step S186, Step S195 in FIG. 40, Step S196 And outputs the game history information in order to the.

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of giving interest to acquiring a game history.

(1-8) A portable terminal (for example, portable terminal 1100)
When a predetermined end operation is performed by a player after a predetermined start operation is performed by a player from a gaming machine capable of performing a predetermined game (for example, slot machine 1, pachinko gaming machine 700) In addition, receiving means (for example, receiving game history information capable of specifying a game history (including not only a game result but also an intermediate progress) during a period from when the predetermined start operation is performed to when the predetermined end operation is performed) , An application program for analyzing a two-dimensional code photographed by the camera unit 190),
Transmitting means (for example, step S101 in FIG. 37) that receives the game history information received by the receiving means to a management device (for example, management server 1200) that manages the gaming history of the player in the gaming machine. Access from the portable terminal 1100).
The game history specified by the management device based on the game history information transmitted by the transmission means (for example, the game history (including those updated and managed in the managed game history)). 38 for receiving from the management device (for example, the step of FIG. 38) data for displaying the data or data for performing special effects (for example, display effects, sound effects, etc.) determined based on the game history S153, step S154, steps S185 and S186 in FIG. 39, and the screen transmitted from the management server 1200 in steps S195 and S196 in FIG. 40 are received).
Production control means for displaying the game history based on the data received by the receiving means or performing the special effect (for example, a web browser for displaying the received screen) is provided.

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to provide a mobile terminal capable of giving interest to acquiring a game history.

(1-9) The program executed by the mobile terminal (for example, the mobile terminal 1100) is
When a predetermined end operation is performed by a player after a predetermined start operation is performed by a player from a gaming machine capable of performing a predetermined game (for example, slot machine 1, pachinko gaming machine 700) In addition, a step of receiving game history information that can specify a game history (including not only a game result but also a halfway progress) during a period from when the predetermined start operation is performed to when the predetermined end operation is performed (for example, An application program for analyzing a two-dimensional code photographed by the camera unit 190);
A step of transmitting the received game history information to a management device (for example, management server 1200) that manages a game history of the player in the gaming machine (for example, from the portable terminal 1100 accepted in step S101 of FIG. 37) Access).
In order to display the game history (including those updated and reflected in the managed game history) specified by the management device (for example, step S102 in FIG. 37) based on the transmitted game history information. Or data for performing special effects (for example, display effects, voice effects, etc.) determined based on the game data or the game history from the management device (for example, steps S153, S154 in FIG. 38, 39. The screens transmitted from the management server 1200 in steps S185 and S186 in FIG. 39 and steps S195 and S196 in FIG. 40 are received).
The portable terminal is caused to execute a step of displaying the game history or performing the special effect based on the received data (for example, a web browser displaying the received screen).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to provide a program that can provide interest in acquiring a game history.

(2-1) A gaming system (for example, gaming system 1001)
Management for managing a gaming machine (for example, slot machine 1, pachinko gaming machine 700) capable of performing a predetermined game, and a game history (including not only a game result but also a halfway progress) of the player. A gaming system including a device (for example, management server 1200),
The gaming machine is
Game history of a period from when the predetermined start operation is performed to when the predetermined end operation is performed after a predetermined start operation by the player is performed Output means (for example, a two-dimensional code for photographing with the portable terminal 1100 as shown in FIG. 14 is displayed. Output to the management server 1200 directly or via a card unit. You may)
The management device
The game history information output by the output means (for example, may be received from the portable terminal 1100 as shown in step S101 of FIG. 37, or may be received directly from the gaming machine or via a card unit. ) Based on the identification means for identifying the game history (for example, step S102 in FIG. 37),
Information receiving means (for example, for receiving player information added by a player from the portable terminal with respect to the game history specified by the specifying means (including those updated and reflected in the managed game history) As shown in steps S157 and S161 in FIG. 38, steps S122 and S123 in FIG. 37, player information received by the portable terminal 1100 may be received from the portable terminal 1100, or a gaming machine or card unit And the player information received in the game history information and output to the portable terminal 1100 may be received from the portable terminal 1100).
Data for displaying on the portable terminal the game history specified by the specifying means (including those updated and reflected in the managed game history) and the player information received by the information receiving means. Transmission means capable of transmitting to the portable terminal (for example, step S154 in FIG. 38, step S186 in FIG. 39, step S196 in FIG. 40, and step S117 in FIG. 37, step S144) is provided.

  According to such a configuration, when a predetermined start operation is performed by the player after the player performs a predetermined start operation, the predetermined end operation is performed after the predetermined start operation is performed by the player. The game history information that can specify the game history during the period until the operation is performed is output. Based on the game history information output from the gaming machine by the management device, the game history is specified, and the player information added by the player to the specified game history is received from the portable terminal, and the specified game Data for displaying the history and the accepted player information on the mobile terminal can be transmitted to the mobile terminal.

  For this reason, the player information added by the player when displaying the game history can be referred to. As a result, it is interesting to acquire the game history.

(2-2) In the gaming system of (2-1) above,
The information accepting means may select any of a plurality of timings from when the game history information is output by the output means to when the data is transmitted by the transmitting means (for example, step S157 and step S161 in FIG. 42B, the timing at which the screen of FIG. 42B is displayed, and the timing at which the screen of FIG. 43E is displayed at steps S122 and S123 in FIG. Can be received.

  According to such a configuration, it is possible for the management device to accept player information at any of a plurality of timings from when the game history information is output until data is transmitted. For this reason, the player can input the player information at a plurality of timings such as a timing for updating the game history and a timing for checking the game history. As a result, it is possible to easily input player information, and it is possible to improve interest.

(2-3) In the game system of (2-1) or (2-2) above,
The transmission means can transmit the data not only to the portable terminal of the player who acquired the game history but also to the portable terminals of other players (for example, step S154 in FIG. 38, FIG. 39 and step S186 in FIG. 40, step S196 in FIG. 40, and step S117 and step S144 in FIG.
The management device further includes:
Whether the player information is the first player information that can be displayed only on the mobile terminal of the player who has acquired the game history, or the second player information that can be displayed on the mobile terminal of another player 38 is received in step S172 in FIG. 38. Also, the setting selected on the screen in FIG. 42D transmitted in step S171 in FIG. The setting selected on the screen of FIG. 43 (G) transmitted in step S127 is received in step S127 of FIG.
The transmission means, for the portable terminal of the player who has acquired the game history, the player information and the second game for which the selection accepting means has accepted the selection as the first player information. The data for displaying the player information that has been accepted as the player information can be transmitted (for example, either “history display” or “memo display” in FIG. 43A can be selected). On the other hand, to the portable terminal of another player, it is possible to transmit data for displaying the player information that has been accepted to be selected as the second player information by the selection receiving means (for example, In FIG. 43 (G), “history display” is selected as “permitted” for publication, and “history display” selected as “permitted” in step S128 of FIG. 37 is set to be disclosed, and FIG. With "history display" Is it possible-option, characterized in that it is a "memo display" is not be selected.).

  According to such a configuration, the management device can transmit data not only to the portable terminal of the player who acquired the game history but also to the portable terminal of other players. Whether the player information is the first player information that can be displayed only on the portable terminal of the player who has acquired the game history, or the second player information that can be displayed on the portable terminal of another player Is received, and the player's portable terminal that has acquired the game history is accepted to receive the selection of the player information as the first player information and the selection of the player information as the second player information. While the data for displaying the selected player information can be transmitted, the player information for which the selection as the second player information is accepted is displayed for the portable terminal of the other player Data can be transmitted.

  For this reason, as player information added by a player, information that can be confirmed only by the player itself and information that can be confirmed by other players can be separated. As a result, the information added by the player can have diversity (for example, diversity in which the balance is the first player information and the proud story and the number of consecutive channels are the second player information).

(2-6) The management device (for example, the management server 1200)
A management device that manages a player's game history (including not only game results but also intermediate progress) in a gaming machine (for example, slot machine 1, pachinko gaming machine 700) capable of performing a predetermined game,
It is output from the gaming machine (for example, a two-dimensional code for photographing with the portable terminal 1100 as shown in FIG. 14 is displayed. Alternatively, it may be output directly to the management server 1200 or via a card unit). Further, after a predetermined start operation by the player, when a predetermined end operation is performed by the player, a period of time from when the predetermined start operation is performed to when the predetermined end operation is performed Based on game history information (which may be received from the mobile terminal 1100, or may be received directly from the gaming machine or via the card unit) that can specify the game history, a specifying means for specifying the game history ( For example, step S102 in FIG.
Information receiving means (for example, for receiving player information added by a player from the portable terminal with respect to the game history specified by the specifying means (including those updated and reflected in the managed game history) As shown in steps S157 and S161 in FIG. 38, steps S122 and S123 in FIG. 37, player information received by the portable terminal 1100 may be received from the portable terminal 1100, or a gaming machine or card unit And the player information received in the game history information and output to the portable terminal 1100 may be received from the portable terminal 1100).
Data for displaying on the portable terminal the game history specified by the specifying means (including those updated and reflected in the managed game history) and the player information received by the information receiving means. Transmission means capable of transmitting to the portable terminal (for example, step S154 in FIG. 38, step S186 in FIG. 39, step S196 in FIG. 40, and step S117 and step S144 in FIG. 37) are provided.

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to provide a management device capable of giving interest to acquiring a game history.

(2-7) A gaming machine (for example, slot machine 1, pachinko gaming machine 700)
A gaming machine capable of performing a predetermined game,
Game history of a period from when the predetermined start operation is performed to when the predetermined end operation is performed after a predetermined start operation by the player is performed Output means for outputting game history information that can specify the two-dimensional code for photographing with the portable terminal 1100 as shown in FIG. 14. Also, it is output to the management server 1200 directly or via a card unit. May also be)
The output means may receive the game history information (for example, from the portable terminal 1100 as shown in step S101 of FIG. 37 or from the gaming machine) by a management device that manages the gaming history of the player in the gaming machine. Game history identified based on (for example, step S102 in FIG. 37) (including those updated and reflected in the managed game history). And the data for displaying on the portable terminal the player information received from the portable terminal by the management device added by the player to the game history can be transmitted to the portable terminal (for example, step of FIG. 38). S154, step S186 in FIG. 39, step S196 in FIG. 40, and steps S117 and S144 in FIG. And outputs the game history information in order to.

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of giving interest to acquiring a game history.

(2-8) The mobile terminal (for example, the mobile terminal 1100)
When a predetermined end operation is performed by a player after a predetermined start operation is performed by a player from a gaming machine capable of performing a predetermined game (for example, slot machine 1, pachinko gaming machine 700) In addition, receiving means (for example, receiving game history information capable of specifying a game history (including not only a game result but also an intermediate progress) during a period from when the predetermined start operation is performed to when the predetermined end operation is performed) , An application program for analyzing a two-dimensional code photographed by the camera unit 190),
First transmission means (for example, step S101 in FIG. 37) that transmits the game history information received by the reception means to a management device (for example, management server 1200) that manages the game history of the player in the gaming machine. And access from the portable terminal 1100 that is accepted in the above).
Second transmission means for transmitting player information added by the player to the game history specified by the game history information received by the receiving means to the management device (for example, step S161 in FIG. 38, FIG. The contents of the memo received in step S123 of 37 are transmitted).
The game history specified by the management device based on the game history information transmitted by the first transmission means (including those updated and reflected in the managed game history) and the second transmission. Receiving means (for example, step S154 in FIG. 38, step S186 in FIG. 39, step S196 in FIG. 40, and FIG. 37) for receiving data for displaying the player information transmitted by the means from the management device The screens transmitted from the management server 1200 in steps S117 and S144 are received).
Display control means for displaying the game history and the player information based on the data received by the receiving means (for example, a web browser for displaying the received screen).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to provide a mobile terminal capable of giving interest to acquiring a game history.

(2-9) The program executed by the mobile terminal (for example, the mobile terminal 1100) is
When a predetermined end operation is performed by a player after a predetermined start operation is performed by a player from a gaming machine capable of performing a predetermined game (for example, slot machine 1, pachinko gaming machine 700) In addition, a step of receiving game history information that can specify a game history (including not only a game result but also a halfway progress) during a period from when the predetermined start operation is performed to when the predetermined end operation is performed (for example, An application program for analyzing a two-dimensional code photographed by the camera unit 190);
A step of transmitting the received game history information to a management device (for example, management server 1200) that manages a game history of the player in the gaming machine (for example, from the portable terminal 1100 accepted in step S101 of FIG. 37) Access).
Steps of transmitting player information added by the player to the game history specified by the received game history information to the management device (for example, received in step S161 of FIG. 38 and step S123 of FIG. 37). The content of the memo is sent)
For displaying the game history specified by the management device based on the transmitted game history information (including those updated and reflected in the managed game history) and the transmitted player information Steps for receiving data from the management apparatus (for example, step S154 in FIG. 38, step S186 in FIG. 39, step S196 in FIG. 40, and a screen transmitted from the management server 1200 in steps S117 and S144 in FIG. 37) Receive)
The portable terminal is caused to execute a step of displaying the game history and the player information (for example, a web browser for displaying the received screen) based on the received data.

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to provide a program that can provide interest in acquiring a game history.

(3-1) A gaming system (for example, gaming system 1001)
Management for managing a gaming machine (for example, slot machine 1, pachinko gaming machine 700) capable of performing a predetermined game, and a game history (including not only a game result but also a halfway progress) of the player. A gaming system including a device (for example, management server 1200),
The gaming machine is
Game history of a period from when the predetermined start operation is performed to when the predetermined end operation is performed after a predetermined start operation by the player is performed Output means (for example, a two-dimensional code for photographing with the portable terminal 1100 as shown in FIG. 14 is displayed. Output to the management server 1200 directly or via a card unit. You may)
The management device
The game history information output by the output means (for example, may be received from the portable terminal 1100 as shown in step S101 of FIG. 37, or may be received directly from the gaming machine or via a card unit. ) Based on the identification means for identifying the game history (for example, step S102 in FIG. 37),
The player's portable terminal that has acquired the game history is updated and stored in accordance with the game history specified by the specifying means (including the game history that has been reflected and updated in the managed game history). Of the information (for example, game history, player information), the first information that can be displayed only on the portable terminal of the player who acquired the gaming history and the second information that can be displayed on the portable terminal of other players Can be transmitted (for example, both “history display” and “memo display” in FIG. 43A can be selected), while other player's mobile terminals can be displayed. On the other hand, data for displaying the second information can be transmitted (for example, “history display” is selected as “permitted” for publication in FIG. 43G, and “permitted” in step S128 of FIG. "History display" selected with 44. In FIG. 44C, “history display” can be selected and “memo display” cannot be selected.) Transmission means (for example, step S154 in FIG. 38, step in FIG. 39) S186, step S196 in FIG. 40, and steps S117 and S144 in FIG. 37.

  According to such a configuration, when a predetermined start operation is performed by the player after the player performs a predetermined start operation, the predetermined end operation is performed after the predetermined start operation is performed by the player. The game history information that can specify the game history during the period until the operation is performed is output. Based on the game history information output from the gaming machine by the management device, the game history is specified, and the player's mobile terminal that has acquired the game history is updated and accumulated according to the specified game history. Among the information, there is data for displaying the first information that can be displayed only on the portable terminal of the player who acquired the game history and the second information that can be displayed on the portable terminal of other players. On the other hand, data for displaying the second information can be transmitted to the portable terminal of another player.

  For this reason, it is possible to show the game history to other players. As a result, it is possible to provide a gaming system that can give more fun to acquiring a gaming history.

(3-2) In the gaming system of (3-1) above,
The management device further includes:
Information (for example, game history, player information) updated and accumulated in accordance with the game history specified by the specifying means (including those updated and reflected in the managed game history) is used as the first information. 38 or the second information is received by selection accepting means (for example, the setting selected on the screen of FIG. 42D transmitted in step S171 of FIG. 38 is the step of FIG. 38). (The setting selected on the screen in FIG. 43G transmitted in step S126 in FIG. 37 is received in step S127 in FIG. 37).
The transmission means selects, with respect to the portable terminal of the player who has acquired the game history, the information that the selection accepting means accepts as the first information and the second information. The data for displaying the received information can be transmitted (for example, either “history display” or “memo display” in FIG. 43A can be selected), while other players' For the portable terminal, it is possible to transmit data for displaying the information accepted as the second information by the selection accepting means (for example, “history display” for publication in FIG. 43G) Is selected as “permitted”, “history display” selected as “permitted” in step S128 of FIG. 37 is set to be disclosed, and “history display” can be selected in FIG. "Memo display" can be selected Not be.) Characterized in that it is a.

  According to such a configuration, the management device accepts selection of whether the information updated and accumulated according to the specified game history is the first information or the second information, and the game history For the portable terminal of the player who has acquired the information, the data for displaying the information accepted as the first information and the information accepted as the second information can be transmitted. On the other hand, data for displaying information that is accepted as selection of the second information can be transmitted to the portable terminal of another player. Therefore, information that can be displayed on the mobile terminal of the player and information that can be displayed on the mobile terminal of another player can be set according to the player's preference.

(3-3) In the gaming system of (3-1) or (3-2) above,
The management device further includes:
In order to display information that recommends the player to use the second information when the information updated and accumulated according to the game history includes specific information that does not appear frequently Is provided with recommended information transmitting means (for example, step S166 in FIG. 38) for transmitting the data to the portable terminal of the player.

  According to such a configuration, when the information updated and accumulated by the management device according to the game history includes specific information that does not appear frequently, the second information is used. Data for displaying information recommended to the player is transmitted to the portable terminal of the player. For this reason, the opportunity which can display the specific information which can receive attention from another player on a portable terminal of another player can be given. As a result, if the specific information can be displayed on the portable terminal of another player, the player can receive attention from the other player, so that the player can feel interesting.

(3-6) The management device (for example, the management server 1200)
A management device that manages a player's game history (including not only game results but also intermediate progress) in a gaming machine (for example, slot machine 1, pachinko gaming machine 700) capable of performing a predetermined game,
It is output from the gaming machine (for example, a two-dimensional code for photographing with the portable terminal 1100 as shown in FIG. 14 is displayed. Alternatively, it may be output directly to the management server 1200 or via a card unit). Further, after a predetermined start operation by the player, when a predetermined end operation is performed by the player, a period of time from when the predetermined start operation is performed to when the predetermined end operation is performed The game history information that can specify the game history (for example, it may be received from the portable terminal 1100 as shown in step S101 of FIG. 37, or may be received directly from the gaming machine or via the card unit). Based on the specifying means (for example, step S102 of FIG. 37) for specifying the game history based on
The player's portable terminal that has acquired the game history is updated and stored in accordance with the game history specified by the specifying means (including the game history that has been reflected and updated in the managed game history). Of the information (for example, game history, player information), the first information that can be displayed only on the portable terminal of the player who acquired the gaming history and the second information that can be displayed on the portable terminal of other players Can be transmitted (for example, both “history display” and “memo display” in FIG. 43A can be selected), while other player's mobile terminals can be displayed. On the other hand, data for displaying the second information can be transmitted (for example, “history display” is selected as “permitted” for publication in FIG. 43G, and “permitted” in step S128 of FIG. "History display" selected with 44. In FIG. 44C, “history display” can be selected and “memo display” cannot be selected.) Transmission means (for example, step S154 in FIG. 38, step in FIG. 39) S186, step S196 in FIG. 40, and steps S117 and S144 in FIG. 37.

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to provide a management device capable of giving interest to acquiring a game history.

(3-7) A gaming machine (for example, slot machine 1, pachinko gaming machine 700)
A gaming machine capable of performing a predetermined game,
Game history of a period from when the predetermined start operation is performed to when the predetermined end operation is performed after a predetermined start operation by the player is performed Output means (for example, a two-dimensional code for photographing with the portable terminal 1100 as shown in FIG. 14 is displayed. Output to the management server 1200 directly or via a card unit. You may)
The output means may receive the game history information (for example, from the portable terminal 1100 as shown in step S101 of FIG. 37 or from the gaming machine) by a management device that manages the gaming history of the player in the gaming machine. The game history specified (for example, step S102 in FIG. 37) (including the one updated and reflected in the managed game history) may be received. Of the information updated and accumulated accordingly (for example, game history, player information), only the mobile terminal of the player who acquired the game history is displayed only on the mobile terminal of the player who acquired the game history. Data for displaying the first information that can be displayed and the second information that can be displayed on the portable terminal of another player can be transmitted (for example, “history of FIG. Display "and" note display "can be selected.) On the other hand, data for displaying the second information can be transmitted to the portable terminal of another player (for example, FIG. 43 (G), “history display” is selected as “permitted” for publication, and “history display” selected as “permitted” in step S128 of FIG. 37 is set to be disclosed, and in FIG. 44 (C). “History display” can be selected, and “Memo display” cannot be selected.) (For example, step S154 in FIG. 38, step S186 in FIG. 39, step S196 in FIG. 40, and step in FIG. 37) The game history information is output for S117 and step S144).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of giving interest to acquiring a game history.

(3-8) The mobile terminal (for example, the mobile terminal 1100)
When a predetermined end operation is performed by a player after a predetermined start operation is performed by a player from a gaming machine capable of performing a predetermined game (for example, slot machine 1, pachinko gaming machine 700) In addition, receiving means (for example, receiving game history information capable of specifying a game history (including not only a game result but also an intermediate progress) during a period from when the predetermined start operation is performed to when the predetermined end operation is performed) , An application program for analyzing a two-dimensional code photographed by the camera unit 190),
Transmitting means for transmitting the game history information received by the receiving means to a management device that manages the game history of the player in the gaming machine (for example, access from the portable terminal 1100 accepted in step S101 in FIG. 37 is received). And)
Information updated and accumulated according to the game history specified by the management device based on the game history information transmitted by the transmission means (including those updated and reflected in the managed game history) For example, the first information that can be displayed only on the portable terminal of the player who has acquired the game history and other information on the portable terminal of the player who has acquired the gaming history. Data for displaying the second information that can be displayed on the portable terminal of the player (for example, either “history display” or “memo display” in FIG. 43A can be selected), etc. In the player's mobile terminal, data for displaying the second information (for example, “history display” is selected as “permitted” for release in FIG. 43 (G), and step S in FIG. The “history display” selected as “permitted” in 28 is set to be disclosed, “history display” can be selected in FIG. 44C, and “memo display” cannot be selected.) Receiving means for receiving from the management device (for example, receiving the screen transmitted from the management server 1200 in step S154 in FIG. 38, step S186 in FIG. 39, step S196 in FIG. 40, and steps S117 and S144 in FIG. 37) And)
Display control means (for example, a web browser that displays a received screen) that displays information updated and accumulated according to the game history based on the data received by the receiving means.

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to provide a mobile terminal capable of giving interest to acquiring a game history.

(3-9) The program executed by the mobile terminal (for example, the mobile terminal 1100) is
When a predetermined end operation is performed by a player after a predetermined start operation is performed by a player from a gaming machine capable of performing a predetermined game (for example, slot machine 1, pachinko gaming machine 700) In addition, a step of receiving game history information that can specify a game history (including not only a game result but also a halfway progress) during a period from when the predetermined start operation is performed to when the predetermined end operation is performed (for example, An application program for analyzing a two-dimensional code photographed by the camera unit 190);
A step of transmitting the received game history information to a management device that manages a game history of the player in the gaming machine (for example, access from the portable terminal 1100 accepted in step S101 in FIG. 37); ,
Information (for example, game history) updated and accumulated in accordance with the game history specified by the management device based on the transmitted game history information (including those updated and reflected in the managed game history) The first information that can be displayed only on the portable terminal of the player who has acquired the game history, and the portable information of other players. Data for displaying second information that can be displayed on the terminal (for example, either “history display” or “memo display” in FIG. 43A can be selected), other player's In the portable terminal, data for displaying the second information (for example, “history display” is selected as “permitted” for publication in FIG. 43G, and “permitted” is selected in step S128 of FIG. 37. The “history display” is set to be disclosed, “history display” can be selected in FIG. 44C, and “memo display” cannot be selected.) From the management device (For example, the screen transmitted from the management server 1200 in step S154 in FIG. 38, step S186 in FIG. 39, step S196 in FIG. 40, and step S117 and step S144 in FIG. 37 is received).
The portable terminal is caused to execute a step (for example, a web browser for displaying a received screen) of displaying information updated and accumulated in accordance with the game history based on the received data.

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to provide a program that can provide interest in acquiring a game history.

(4-1) A gaming machine (for example, slot machine 1, pachinko gaming machine 700) capable of performing a predetermined game and a game history (not only a game result but also a halfway progress) of the game machine of the player are included. A gaming system (for example, gaming system 1001) including a management device (for example, management server 1200) for managing
The management device
Issuing means for issuing a password including specific information (for example, a numerical value indicating the level and story stage itself, or information capable of specifying a numerical value indicating the level and story stage) (for example, 26, step S234) of FIG.
The gaming machine is
Password input accepting means (for example, step S1231 in FIG. 27) for accepting the input of the password (for example, the password issued by the management server 1200 according to the game history and received by the mobile terminal 1100);
After the input of the password is accepted by the password input acceptance means, a predetermined end condition (for example, a condition that a two-dimensional code display operation has been performed, a condition that the display has shifted to the demo screen, a new password is entered and a new password is entered) When the acquisition of a new game history is started, the condition that a power interruption has occurred, and the condition that a long press start of the effect switch has been established) The output means (for example, step S1262, step S1263 in FIG. 29) outputs the game history information (for example, a two-dimensional code) that can specify the game history during the period until the end condition is satisfied with the specific information. As in step S1267, the data may be output to the portable terminal 1100, or the card unit may be directly connected to the management server 1200. May be output in. And),
Game history information specifying information that can specify the game history information output by the output means (for example, image data of a two-dimensional code as shown in FIG. 24 or game history data may be used. )) And the password accepted by the password input accepting means (for example, the password itself as shown in FIG. 24, or the numerical value itself indicating the level and the stage of the story included in the password). Or password storage means (for example, step S1265 in FIG. 29) for storing the information in association with each other.
The management device
Object determination means for determining whether or not the specific information included in the password issued by the issuing means and the specific information attached to the game history information output by the output means are the same (for example, FIG. Step S242),
A specifying means (for example, step S246 in FIG. 26) for specifying a game history based on the game history information output by the output means;
A game history storage means (for example, step S246 in FIG. 26) for storing the game history specified by the specifying means on the condition that the specific information is determined to be the same by the target determination means (the game history is stored) Each time it is played, the password corresponding to the game history may be stored).
The gaming machine further includes:
Determining means for determining whether or not the password received by the password input accepting means is stored in the password storage means (for example, comparing passwords themselves as in steps S1232 and S1233 in FIG. 27) The password may be completely matched or partially matched, or the password may be completely matched by comparing the level and story level included in the password.)
The output means stores the password in association with the password on the condition that the determination means determines that the password is stored (for example, YES is determined in step S1233 of FIG. 27). The game history information specified by the game history information specifying information stored in the means is output again (for example, step S1242 in FIG. 27).

  According to such a configuration, a password including specific information is issued by the management device. After the password input is received by the gaming machine and the password input is received, when the predetermined end condition is satisfied, the game during the period from when the password input is received until the predetermined end condition is satisfied The game history information that can specify the history is output with the specific information, and the output game history information that can specify the game history information and the password that is accepted are stored in association with each other. . The management device determines whether or not the specific information included in the issued password is the same as the specific information attached to the game history information output from the gaming machine, and the gaming history output from the gaming machine Based on the information, the game history is specified, and the specified game history is stored on condition that the specific information is determined to be the same. It is determined whether or not the password accepted by the gaming machine is stored. If it is determined that the password is stored, the game history information specifying information stored in association with the password is stored. The game history information specified in is output again.

  For this reason, when an old password is input, game history information corresponding to the password is output again. As a result, it is possible to provide a gaming system capable of preventing a decrease in the interest of a game without penalizing the player even if the user can forget to record a password that can identify the previous game history. be able to.

(4-2) In the gaming system of (4-1) above,
The gaming machine further includes:
Stored in the password storage unit in association with the password on condition that the determination unit determines that the password is stored (for example, YES in step S1233 in FIG. 27). It is characterized by comprising already-output notification means (for example, step S1241 in FIG. 27) for notifying that the game history information specified by the game history information specifying information has already been output.

  According to such a configuration, the game history information specified by the game history information specifying information stored in association with the password is already stored on the condition that the password is determined to be stored by the gaming machine. The fact that it has been output is notified.

For this reason, when an old password is input, the player is notified that game history information corresponding to the password has already been output. As a result, by preventing the game from being started with the old password, it is possible to prevent the game from being reduced without detriment to the player.

(4-3) A gaming machine (for example, slot machine 1, pachinko gaming machine 700)
A gaming machine capable of performing a predetermined game,
Password input accepting means for accepting an input of a password including specific information issued by a management device that manages a game history of the player in the gaming machine;
After the password input is accepted by the password input acceptance means, when a predetermined end condition is satisfied, a game history of a period from when the password input is received until the predetermined end condition is satisfied Output means for outputting the specific information to the identifiable game history information; and
A password storage means for storing the game history information specifying information capable of specifying the game history information output by the output means and the password received by the password input receiving means in association with each other;
Determining means for determining whether or not the password received by the password input receiving means is stored in the password storage means;
The output means is a game specified by the game history information specifying information stored in the password storage means in association with the password on condition that the determination means determines that the password is stored. The history information is output again.

  According to such a configuration, even if the user can forget to record a password that can identify a previous game history, a game that can prevent a decrease in the interest of the game without penalizing the player Machine can be provided.

(5-1) Including a gaming machine (for example, slot machine 1 and pachinko gaming machine 700) capable of performing a predetermined game, and a game history of the player in the gaming machine (not only a game result but also a halfway progress). A gaming system (for example, gaming system 1001) including a management device (for example, management server 1200) for managing
The management device
Issuing means for issuing a password including specific information (for example, a numerical value indicating the level and story stage itself, or information capable of specifying a numerical value indicating the level and story stage) (for example, 26, step S234) of FIG.
The gaming machine is
Password input accepting means (for example, step S1231 in FIG. 27) for accepting the input of the password (for example, the password issued by the management server 1200 according to the game history and received by the mobile terminal 1100);
After the input of the password is accepted by the password input acceptance means, a predetermined end condition (for example, a condition that a two-dimensional code display operation has been performed, a condition that the display has shifted to the demo screen, a new password is entered and a new password is entered) When the acquisition of a new game history is started, the condition that a power interruption has occurred, and the condition that a long press start of the effect switch has been established) The output means (for example, step S1262, step S1263 in FIG. 29) outputs the game history information (for example, a two-dimensional code) that can specify the game history during the period until the end condition is satisfied with the specific information. As in step S1267, the data may be output to the portable terminal 1100, or the card unit may be directly connected to the management server 1200. May be output in. And),
Game history information specifying information that can specify the game history information output by the output means (for example, image data of a two-dimensional code as shown in FIG. 24 or game history data may be used. ) And specific information included in the password accepted by the password input accepting means (for example, the password itself as shown in FIG. 24, the level included in the password, and the stage of the story) A password storage unit (for example, step S1265 in FIG. 29) that stores the numerical value itself and the information indicating that the numerical value indicating the level and the stage of the story can be specified. Prepared,
The management device
Object determination means for determining whether or not the specific information included in the password issued by the issuing means and the specific information attached to the game history information output by the output means are the same (for example, FIG. Step S242),
A specifying means (for example, step S246 in FIG. 26) for specifying a game history based on the game history information output by the output means;
A game history storage means (for example, step S246 in FIG. 26) for storing the game history specified by the specifying means on the condition that the specific information is determined to be the same by the target determination means (the game history is stored) Each time it is played, the password corresponding to the game history may be stored).
The gaming machine further includes:
Determining means for determining whether or not the password received by the password input accepting means is stored in the password storage means (for example, comparing passwords themselves as in steps S1232 and S1233 in FIG. 27) The password may be completely matched or partially matched, or the password may be completely matched by comparing the level and story level included in the password.)
Stored in the password storage unit in association with the password on condition that the determination unit determines that the password is stored (for example, YES in step S1233 of FIG. 27). It is provided with already-output notification means (for example, step S1241 in FIG. 27) for notifying that the game history information specified by the game history information specifying information has already been output.

  According to such a configuration, a password including specific information is issued by the management device. After the password input is received by the gaming machine and the password input is received, when the predetermined end condition is satisfied, the game during the period from when the password input is received until the predetermined end condition is satisfied The game history information that can specify the history is output with the specific information, and the output game history information that can specify the game history information and the password that is accepted are stored in association with each other. . The management device determines whether the specific information included in the issued password is the same as the specific information attached to the game history information output from the gaming machine, and the gaming history information output from the gaming machine Based on the above, the game history is specified, and the specified game history is stored on condition that it is determined that the specific information is the same. It is determined whether or not the password accepted by the gaming machine is stored. If it is determined that the password is stored, the game history information specifying information stored in association with the password is stored. It is notified that the game history information specified in is already output.

  For this reason, when an old password is input, the player is notified that game history information corresponding to the password has already been output. As a result, it is possible to provide a gaming system that can prevent a player from starting a game with an old password, and can prevent a decrease in the interest of the game without causing any disadvantage to the player.

(5-2) In the gaming system of (5-1) above,
The output means stores the password in association with the password on condition that the determination means determines that the password is stored (for example, YES is determined in step S1233 of FIG. 27). The game history information specified by the game history information specifying information stored in the means is output again (for example, step S1242 in FIG. 27).

  According to such a configuration, on the condition that the password is stored by the gaming machine, the game history information specified by the game history information specifying information stored in association with the password is again stored. Is output.

  For this reason, when an old password is input, game history information corresponding to the password is output again. As a result, even if the user has forgotten to record a password that can identify the previous game history, it is possible to prevent the game from being reduced without detriment to the player.

(5-3) In the gaming system according to (4-1), (4-2), (5-1) or (5-2),
The gaming machine further includes:
Comprising a condition determination means (for example, step S1261 in FIG. 29) for determining whether or not the end condition is satisfied;
The password storage means, on the condition that the condition determination means determines that the termination condition is satisfied (for example, YES is determined in step S1261 in FIG. 29), and the game history information specifying information and the password storage means The password is stored in association with each other (for example, step S1265 in FIG. 29).

  According to such a configuration, it is determined whether or not the end condition is satisfied by the gaming machine, and the game history information specifying information and the password are associated with each other on the condition that the end condition is determined to be satisfied. Is remembered.

  For this reason, even if the end condition is satisfied but the game history information is not made, information capable of specifying the game history information corresponding to the input password is stored. As a result, the game history information can be provided to the player, so that the player can be prevented from being disadvantaged.

(5-4) In the game system according to any one of (4-1) to (4-3) and (5-1) to (5-3),
The management device further includes:
Whether the specific information that can be specified by the password when the password is issued this time by the issuing means is the same as the specific information that can be specified by the previously issued password. Game history determination means for determining (step S234 in FIG. 26),
The issuing means does not generate a password this time and issues the previously issued password on condition that the game history determining means determines that the current and previous specific information are the same (FIG. 26). Step S234).

  According to such a configuration, when the password is issued by the management device this time, the specific information that can be specified by the password is the same as the specific information that can be specified by the previously issued password. If it is determined whether or not the current specific information is the same as the previous specific information, no password is generated this time, and the previously issued password is issued.

  For this reason, when there is no change in the specific information, a new password is not generated, and a once generated password is issued. As a result, the processing burden on the management device can be reduced.

(5-5) A gaming machine (for example, slot machine 1, pachinko gaming machine 700)
A gaming machine capable of performing a predetermined game,
Password input accepting means for accepting an input of a password including specific information issued by a management device that manages a game history of the player in the gaming machine;
After the password input is accepted by the password input acceptance means, when a predetermined end condition is satisfied, a game history of a period from when the password input is received until the predetermined end condition is satisfied Output means for outputting the specific information to the identifiable game history information; and
A password storage means for storing the game history information specifying information capable of specifying the game history information output by the output means and the password received by the password input receiving means in association with each other;
A determination unit for determining whether or not the password received by the password input reception unit is stored in the password storage unit;
The game history information specified by the game history information specifying information stored in the password storage means in association with the password is already output on condition that the determination means determines that the password is stored. It is provided with the existing output alerting | reporting means which alert | reports that it did.

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of preventing a decrease in the interest of the game without causing a disadvantage to the player by preventing the game from being started with an old password. be able to.

  It should be understood that the embodiment disclosed this time is illustrative in all respects and not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is defined by the terms of the claims, rather than the description above, and is intended to include any modifications within the scope and meaning equivalent to the terms of the claims.

  1 slot machine, 1a chassis, 1b front door, 2 reel unit, 2L, 2C, 2R reel, 3 perspective window, 4 medal insertion part, 6 MAXBET switch, 7 start switch, 8L, 8C, 8R stop switch, 9 medal Payout port, 10 settlement switch, 11 credit display, 12 game auxiliary display, 13 game display, 23 reset switch, 24 set value display, 25 door open detection switch, 30 flow path switching solenoid, 31 throw medal sensor , 32L, 32C, 32R reel motor, 33L, 33C, 33R reel sensor, 34 hopper unit, 34a hopper tank, 34b hopper motor, 34c delivery sensor, 35 overflow tank, 35a tan sensor, 36a stop switch, 36b automatic settlement Switch, 37 Setting key switch, 38 Setting switch, 39 Power switch, 40 Game control board, 41 Main control unit, 41d, 91d Port, 42, 7503 Random number circuit, 43 Pulse oscillator, 44, 96 Switch detection circuit, 45 Motor drive Circuit, 46 Solenoid drive circuit, 47, 93 drive circuit, 48, 98 Power interruption detection circuit, 49, 95 Reset circuit, 51 Liquid crystal display, 51a, 51b Specific effect area, 53, 727R, 727L Speaker, 56 Effect switch , 57, 7757 Seat separation sensor, 80 stage relay board, 90, 780 stage control board, 91 sub-control unit, 92 display control circuit, 94 audio output circuit, 97 clock device, 100 power box, 101 power board, 110, 210 Control unit, 120, 220 storage unit, 130 230 Operation unit, 140, 240 Display unit, 150 Voice input / output unit, 160 Wireless communication unit, 161 Antenna, 180 Infrared communication unit, 190 Camera unit, 260 communication unit, 700 Pachinko machine, 702 Glass door frame, 703 Hitting ball supply Plate, 704 Surplus ball tray, 705 Hitting control handle, 706 Game board, 707 Game area, 708a First special symbol display, 708b Second special symbol display, 709 Production display device, 710 Normal symbol display, 713 First Start winning port, 713a First start port switch, 714 Second start winning port, 714a Second start port switch, 715 Variable winning ball device, 716, 721 Solenoid, 718a First special symbol hold memory display, 718b Second special Design hold memory display, 718c First hold memory display, 718d Hold memory display unit, 720 special variable winning ball device, 723 count switch, 726 out port, 731 main board, 732 gate, 732a gate switch, 735 lamp driver board, 737 payout control board, 741 normal symbol hold memory display, 757 Port unit, 758 input driver circuit, 759 output circuit, 770 audio output board, 774 unidirectional circuit, 777 relay board, 900 Internet network, 1000 external output board, 1001 gaming system, 1100 mobile terminal, 1200 management server, 7100 production Microcomputer for control, 7102, 7351, 7702 Input driver, 7103 Input port, 7104, 7105, 7571 Output port, 7111 Chance button, 7352 driver, 7560 Game control Microcomputer, 7705 amplifying circuit, 7706 volume.

Claims (2)

A gaming system including a gaming machine capable of performing a predetermined game and a management device for managing a gaming history of the player in the gaming machine,
The management device
With the issue means for issuing the player a password to make it possible to continue the specific information with which it is possible to identify a part of the past of the game history from unrealized past game history to update the game history,
The gaming machine is
Password input acceptance means for accepting input of the password from the player ;
After the password input is accepted by the password input acceptance means, when a predetermined end condition is satisfied, a game history of a period from when the password input is received until the predetermined end condition is satisfied Output means for outputting the specific information to the identifiable game history information; and
Game history information specifying information capable of specifying the game history information output by the output means, and password storage means for storing the password accepted by the password input receiving means in association with each other,
The management device
Target determination means for determining whether the specific information included in the password issued by the issuing means and the specific information attached to the game history information output by the output means are the same;
A specifying means for specifying a game history based on the game history information output by the output means;
Game history storage means for storing the game history specified by the specifying means, provided that the specific information is determined to be the same by the target determining means;
The gaming machine further includes:
A determination unit for determining whether or not the password received by the password input reception unit is stored in the password storage unit;
The game history information specified by the game history information specifying information stored in the password storage means in association with the password is already output on condition that the determination means determines that the password is stored. A gaming system comprising: an already-notified output notifying means for notifying that the game has been completed. A gaming machine capable of performing a predetermined game,
It possible to update the player's game history continues specific information capable of specifying the unrealized past game history part of the past game history is issued by the management apparatus for managing a game history of the game machine Password input accepting means for accepting input of a password for the player from the player ,
After the password input is accepted by the password input acceptance means, when a predetermined end condition is satisfied, a game history of a period from when the password input is received until the predetermined end condition is satisfied Output means for outputting the specific information to the identifiable game history information; and
A password storage means for storing the game history information specifying information capable of specifying the game history information output by the output means and the password received by the password input receiving means in association with each other;
A determination unit for determining whether or not the password received by the password input reception unit is stored in the password storage unit;
The game history information specified by the game history information specifying information stored in the password storage means in association with the password is already output on condition that the determination means determines that the password is stored. A gaming machine, comprising: an already-notified output notifying means for notifying that the game has been performed.

Images